Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D06-388 - Segment 4 - Kohl's - Retail BuildingD06-388 Kohl's 17150 Southcenter Parkway Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 3 segments for easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit segments: Segment 1 - Kohl's D06 -388s Segment 2 - Kohl's D06-388 Segment 3 - Kohl's D06-388 Segment 4 - Kohl's D06-388 Segment 5 - Plans - Kohl's D06-388 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. In areas where shop -painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL_ A. All welds and side lap fasteners shall be inspected by a qualified testing agency prior to touch-up painting. 1 END OF SECTION tf STEEL DECK Section 05300 - 6 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc.— Hazel Dell, WM Project Ko. 30651 i September 13, 20061 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 05400 LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Lightgage Metal Framing as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Framing for exterior walls. 2. Framing for interior partitions. 3. Combination Stud/Standard. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related work specified elsewhere includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 01300 - 2. Section 01410 - 3 Section 05000 4. Section 05210 5. Section 05700 6. Sec5on 06100 7. Section 07240 8. Section 09250 Submittals. Testing and Inspection. - Structural Steel. Steel Joists and Joist Girders. - Miscellaneous Metals. - Carpentry. - Exterior Insulation and Finish System. - Gypsum Wallboard. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Reference Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. The design, fabrication and erection shall conform to the AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures. 4. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 22 — Steel. b. Chapter 25 — Gypsum Board and Plaster. 5. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). 6. Underwiters' Laboratories (UL). LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING Section 05400 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs in accordance with AISI. "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". C. Design Criteria: 1. Wind loads in accordance with the governing state or local Building Code. D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: 1. Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire - resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. E. For interior, full height, partition framing attaching to the underside of structure, comply with UL 2079 for cyclic movement. F. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS 01.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel," and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steer. 1. Welding operators shall be previously qualified by test as prescribed in the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure" or by such other tests as govemmei7tal agencies having jurisdiction may prescribe. Welds shall be mads only by operators who are qualified to perform the type of work required, as evidenced by their passing the above prescribed tests. Tests completed earlier than 12 months prior to their employment on the work shall not be acceptable. Contractor shall assume all costs in connection with operator certification. G. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. H. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the project site in original unopened packaging, containers or bundles, with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Handle materials in a manner to prevent damage. B. Store materials to protect from damage by moisture, debris. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Verify with Kohl's Project Manager which manufacturer to purchase from. LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING Section 05400 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 1Z 2006 B. Steel Framing Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with designations and section properties provide products complying with ICBG Evaluation Report ER -4943P htto:l/www.icc-es.orglrecortslodf files/ICBO-ES/4943o.odf C. Combination Stud/Standard: 1. Clemco-Elite Standard Systems. See Vendor Contact List on Kohlaborate web site for contact information. 2. Crown Metal Mfg. Company. See Vendor Contact List on Kohiaborate web site for contact information. 2.02 SYSTEMS A Provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for each type of metal framing required, as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, and as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Manufacturer's standard non-bearing steel studs of size, shape and gage as determined by manufacturer's registered engineer. C. Slotted Studs (As required): gir 1. Slot;` d Slip Track: 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel channels with slotted holes in the flanges and pop-up tabs in the web. a. Connections of the slotted slip track to the structure above shall be designed to resist 140 lbs. per stud minimum horizontal load at each stud or 5 psf of wall surface, whichever is greater, unless otherwise noted. 2. Fire Resistive Construction: SLP-TRKTM by Sliptrack Systems, or equal, per ICBG ER -5344 http://www.icc-es.org/reportslndf files/ICBG-ES/5344.pdf D. Combination Stud/Standard: 1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide single sided and double sided Stud Assembly. a. Type: 11/16" deep reveal for 5/8" thick gypsum board. 1) Stud Size: 3-5/8" with 1/2" slots 1" on center, 0.125" wall thickness. 2) Or as selected from Manufacturer's standards. b. Anchor Clips and Fasteners: Stud Manufacturer's standard. LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING Section 05400 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Accessories' Manufacturers: 1. Steel framing manufacturers specified above. 2. The Steel Network, Inc. F. Refer to Section 09250 for additional information. 2.03 MATERIALS A. For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi, ASTM A1008 or A1011, and hot -dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653. B. For 18 gage or lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A1008 or A1011, and hot - dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653. C. Furring and Runner Channels: Hot -rolled or cold -roiled steel channels coated with rust -inhibitive paint and weighing per 1,000 lineal feet, before coating, not Tess than: ';SIZE" aM_ =' 10-F ROLLED ..:'COLp.=ROLLE[ : m°' 314" 300 lbs. 300 lbs. 1-1/2" _ , 1,120 lbs. 475 lbs. 7 2" 1,260 lbs. 590 lbs, D. Finishes. 1. Exterior Framing: Provide galvanized finish complying with ASTM A653 for minimum G-60 coating on metal framing and components. 2. Interior Framing: Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop -applied red -oxide, zinc -chromate, or other similar rust inhibitive primer. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage and distortion. B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING Section 05400 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, examine areas designated to receive the work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as specified herein. B. Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. 1. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or powder -driven fasteners, or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at comers, intersection, splice ends of tracks. 2. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing and as required for non -plumb Valls, warped surfaces and similar requirements. 3. Where stud system abuts structural columns and walls including concrete and masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners or supporting structure. 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls and partitions are indicated to support work requiring attachment to the wall and partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case. 5. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. 8. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4'-0" o.c. unless design requires stricter spacing. Fasten at each intersection. C. Lateral (horizontal) bracing shall be provided by use of sheathing facing material in accordance with Section 5.1 of AISI Specification. Bracing may also be provided either by means of horizontal straps on the face of the studs or cold rolled channels through the webs of the studs. Spacing and installation of horizontal bracing must as recommended in writing by the manufacturer. D. Install Combination Studs/Standard and wallboards per Manufacturer's printed installation instructions and as shown on Drawings. 3.03 FINISHING A. Field Painting: Touch-up shop -applied protective coatings damaged during handling LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING Section 05400 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 4. Div. 15 — Mechanical: Roof mounted HVAC units, piping and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. American Welding Society (AWS). 4. Federal Specifications (FS). 5. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 16 — Structural Design. b. Chapter 22 -- Steel. 6. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication. C. Comply with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction at Project location if those requirements are more stringent then those indicated herein. 1. Pipe Railings: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated. a. Concentrated load of 250 lbs applied non -concurrently, vertically downward, or horizontally. b. Uniform Toad of 50 lbs per linear foot applied non -concurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Uniform load of 100 LB per square foot or a concentrated load of 300 LB on an area of 4 square inches located in the center of the tread, whichever produces the greater stress. 3. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 LB per MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 square foot 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above as well as stresses resulting from railing system loads. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without caused delay in the Work. D. Installer Qualifications: Five years experience minimum in installations similar to those specified herein. E. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steer, and D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum". 1. Welding operators shall be previously qualified by test as prescribed in the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure" or by such other tests as govemmental agencies having jurisdiction may prescribe. Welds shall be made only by operators who are qualified to perform the type of work required, as evidenced by their passing the above prescribed tests. Tests completed earlier than 12 months prior to their employment on the work shall not be acceptable. Contractor shall assume all costs in connection with operator certification, r 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver iron and steel fabrications to the Project site and store in a manner to avoid damage and distortion of materials. S. Identify pieces with suitable mark for easy location. C. Deliver products in the original wrappings or cartons clearly marked for identification and bearing manufacturers name, and model or part number if applicable. Store protected from damage and the elements. Replace damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials as directed by the Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are named in this Section to establish a standard of quality. An materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36. B. Steel Plates to be Beat or Formed Cold: ASTM A203. C. Cold -finished Steel Bars: ASTM A108. MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Steel Pipe: Welded or seamless, ASTM A53, black and hot dipped galvanized. E. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed ASTM A500, or hot -rolled ASTM A501. F. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653. G. Checkered Plate: FS QQ-F-461C (1), Class 1. H. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, galvanized. I. Welding Electrodes: AWS Specifications. J. Ferrous Metal Primer: SSPC 13-64; FS TT -P-86, Types II; FS TT -P-615 Type II, as applicable for the environmental conditions and compatible with finish painting systems specified. K. Galvanized Primer: FS TT -P -641d. L. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion ASTM 01187. M. Hydraulic Cement 1. "K -Ment Anchoring Cement" by Euclid Chemical Co. 2. "Five Star Structural Concrete" by Five Star Products, Inc. 3. "Suter Porok" by Hallemite Company 4. SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp. N. Prefabricated Steel Treads and Landings: Welded steel bar grating with closed ends, ADA compliant, by McNichols Co. http:/lwww.mcnichols.com/ 1. Bearing bar size as required by design. 2. Tread and landing sizes as shown on Drawings. 3. Factory applied coating. O. Fasteners: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 and A325, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF -B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF -S-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF -S-111. 5. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF -W-92. 6. Drilled -In Expansion Anchors: Comply with FS FF -S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, {non -drilling}), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF -B-575, Grade 5. 7. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF -B-588, type, class, and style as required. MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 -4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 8. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF -W-84. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrications and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and leve! with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. C. Allow for thermal movement in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up on joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately, Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matched those adjacent. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring device as to provide adequate support for intended use. MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. M. Rough Hardware: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes and required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structure. 2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. 2.04 STEEL LADDERS A. Industry Standards: 1. OS-NA/ANSI A14.3 "Safety Code for Fixed Ladders" specifies the minimum design requirements for ladders and safety cages. a. Safety cages only where required by OSHA. B. Fabricate Ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as required. Comply with requirements of OSHAfANS1 A14.3 except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide channel rail full height side rails with eased edges. 2. Provide solid structural steel bar rungs. C. Fit rungs into punched holes in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. D. Support each ladder at top and bottom. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage and to hold the ladder 7" clear of the wall surface and other obstructing construction. E. Provide non -slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. 1. Shop prime all ladders, brackets and fasteners. 2. Ladders, brackets and fasteners to be field painted. 2.05 CATCH BASINS - TRUCKWELL MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Storm Grate with cast iron angle frame with cast iron anchors, cast into concrete slab flush with the concrete paving. Refer to Drawings for additional information. Acceptable Manufacturer: Neenah Foundry Co. htto://www.nfco.com/, or as shown on Drawings. B. Finish: Standard mill casting. C. Attachment Grate shall be bolted to frame. 2.06 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. 2.07 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls, only where indicated on Plans. 2.08 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural Toads. B. Interconnect railings and handrail members by butt -welding or welding with integral. connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting member to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around. 2. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: a. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings. b. By radius bends of radius indicated. c. By mitering at elbow bends. d. By bending. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3116 -inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railing and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 6 inches long with an inside diameter not less than '/ inch greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve, G. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. H. Exterior steel railings and handrails shall be formed from galvanized steel pipe. I. Railing Infill: Chain link fabric, or as shown on Drawings. 2.09 EXTERIOR FLOOR GRATING TREADS AND PLATFORMS (If shown on Drawings) A. Fabricate to comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual. B. Provide Galvanized Steel Grating Treads and Platforms: 1" x 3/16" bearing bars at 7116" o.c. and cross bars at 4" o.c. C. Serrated surface treads with cast abrasive nosing with steel angle carrier at each end for stringer connections, Platforms with nosing to match tread nosing. 2.10 INTERIOR METAL PAN STAIRS A. Metal pan risers, subtreads, and subplatforms: Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated, but not less than that required, to support total design loading. B. Form metal pans of galvanized steel sheet. C. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting or bolting. D. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. E. At contractor's option, provide prefabricated stair assemblies with pre -filled treads consisting of pre -poured reinforced concrete fill, with non -slip aggregate finish, in welded sheet metal pan, attached to installed stringers using manufacturer's standard connection detail. MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.11 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Fabricate pipe bollards from schedule 40 steel pipe of size 6" diameter. 1. Exterior Finish: Galvanized. 2. Interior Finish: Prime and paint finish. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars or welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware hangers, and similar items. C. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 114 inch x 8 inches long. 2.13 FINISHES A. General: r 1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. 2. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. STEEL and IRON Finishes: 1. Galvanizing: For those items indicted for galvanizing, apply zinc -coating by the hot -dip process compliance with the following requirements: a. ASTM A152 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. b. ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and un -fabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPCSP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 `Paint Application Specification No, 1" for shop painting. a. Stripe paint all edges, comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. b. Primer: Tnemec 10-1009 Grey Primer 2.0- 2.5 DFT or performance equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site C. Center nosings on tread widths with nose flush with riser faces and tread surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to in -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous meta! fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units, which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non -shrink, nonmetallic grout. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8 inch build-up, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior, or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. C. Anchor rail ends Into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. ;r 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METALS Section 05700 -11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 05800 FENCES - MEZZANINE I STOCK AREA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide interior Chain Link Fencing as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Galvanized pipe posts and railing. 2. Wire mesh. 3. Hardware and accessories, as required for a complete job. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 05700 - Miscellaneous Metals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM international (ASTM). 2. American Welding Society (AWS). 3. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 22 — Steel. B. Standard Fencing Design: Sizes of framing members and other components shown on Drawings are minimum cross sections and weights for this project. Contractor shall increase framing member size or decrease spacing of members to meet codes, local conditions, and as determined by manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. FENCES — MEZZANINE ! STOCK AREA Section 05800 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CHAIN LINK FENCING A. Framework: Galvanized steel tubular sections in accordance with ASTM F1083, galvanized steel pipe in Table 1 (Schedule 40), or ASTM A53, with not less than 1.8 ounce of zinc per sq. ft. of surface. B. Standard Fencing Fabric: 2" x 2" x 9 gauge core size steel wire, Class 2 galvanized per ASTM A392 (2.0 ounce per square foot) or aluminum coated per ASTM A491 (0.4 ounce per square foot). 1. Fabrication: a. Top selvages shall be knuckled for fencing up to and including 5'-O" high. Both top and bottom selvages shall be twisted and barbed for fencing over 5'-Q" high. b. Provide one-piece fabric widths for fencing up to and including 12'-0" high and two-piece fabric widths for fencing up to 201-0" high. Two- piece widths shall be attached with fabric edges overlapping 1" maximum and wire -tied at 15" O.C. maximum. C. End, Comer, Line and Pull Posts and spacing: As shown on Drawings. D. Top, Bottom, and Intermediate Rails: Unless shown otherwise, provide 1-5/8" OD steel pipe, in manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion type couplings, approximately 6" long, for each joint. Provide hardware for attaching rail securely to each pull and end post E. Posts Tops: Die-cast aluminum dome closure cap, one for each post F. Truss Rods: Minimum 318" diameter threaded steel rod with turnbuckle. G. Tension Rods: Layout standard lengths to equal full height of fabric, with maximum cross section to suit fabric openings. Provide one tension rod for each end post and two for each comer and pull post. H. Tension Bands: Minimum 14 gauge x 3/4" wide pressed steel. L Tie Wires: Minimum 9 gauge galvanized steel. FENCES — MEZZANINE !STOCK AREA Section 05800 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.02 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Galvanized, ASTM A153 with zinc weights per ASTM Table 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fences in accordance with ASTM F567, accepted shop drawings and manufacture's printed instructions. B. Weld posts to steel channel surround at base of mezzanine. Secure posts to steel bracing at bottom chord of steel joists. Provide slip connection to eliminate transfer of roof loads to fence components. Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. C. Set posts as showmen Drawings. Check each post for vertical and top align and hold in position during installation. D. Provide top, bottom and intermediate rails as shown. Install in one piece between posts. E. Securely fasten diagonal braces to the terminal post and the adjacent line post. There shall be no more than a 50° angle between the brace and the floor slab. Securely fasten horizontal braces with truss rods to the adjacent line post and terminal posts. Support the top rail at each post so that a continuous brace is formed from end to end of each stretch of fence. F. Secure one end of chain link fabric and apply sufficient tension to remove all stack before making attachment elsewhere. Tighten the fabric to provide a smooth uniform appearance, free from sag. G. Cut fabric by untwisting one picket and attach each span independently at all terminal posts. Install tension rods with tension bands at 15" O.C. Join rolls of wire fabric by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to form a continuous mesh. H. Fasten fabric to line posts at 15" O.C. Fasten fabric to top and horizontal rails at 24" O.C. I. Tie Wires: Clasp pipe and fabric firmly with ends of tie wires twisted at least two full turns. Bend wire to minimize hazard to people or clothing. J. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fencing opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or threads to prevent removal of nuts. FENCES — MEZZANINE 1 STOCK AREA Section 05800 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 K. Clearances: Install fencing with a maximum W clearance between the perimeter of the fabric and the framing, and between the framing and adjacent construction. Close off gaps exceeding W at the direction of the Owner's representative. L. Touch up finish coat to match original finish at all welds and wherever factory applied finish is damaged or abraded during construction. 3.03 CLEANING UP A. During the progress of the work, the premises shall be kept free of debris and waste. Upon completion, remove from the site and dispose of all debris and surplus materials in a lawful manner. S. At completion of work, touch up minor damage to adjacent construction and prefinished surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Replace materials damaged or stained during installation. Protect completed work until final acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION FENCES — MEZZANINE 1 STOCK AREA Section 05800 -4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2005 SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Rough Carpentry as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. include without limitation: 1. Framing, decking, wall sheathing, and furring. 2. Blocking, roof curbs: nailing strips, grounds, anchors. 3. Temporary rough carpentry including scaffolding, runways, rubbish chutes, enclosures, guardrails, barricades and ladders. 4. Rough hardware. B. Provide Finish Carpentry as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Restroom millwork fabrication and installation. 2. Restroom countertops and cornice molding. 3. Miscellaneous products specified herein. 4. Installation of products specified elsewhere. C. Install items furnished by Kohl's: 1. Modular prefabricated Lounge cabinets and countertops. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 07920 2. Section 08710 3. Section 09900 4. Section 10440 5. Section 10820 - - Sealants. - Finish Hardware. - Painting. - Building Signage. Toilet Accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards, Rough Carpentry: CARPENTRY Section 06100 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. American Plywood Association (APA). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). 4. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB). 5. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 7 Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 15 — Roof Assemblies and Roof Structures. c. Chapter 16 — Structural Design. d. Chapter 23 — Wood. 6. Federal Specifications (FS). 7. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., (UL). 8. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades and species include the following: a. Satithern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). b. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). c. Western Wood Product Association (WWPA). 9. Span Tables: National Forest Products Association. 10. Working Stresses: National Forest Products Association, National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Design Values for Wood Construction. B. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules for inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. C. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirement and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes and required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. E. Redwood: 1. "Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber" as CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 published by the Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). F. Hardwood Lumber: National Hardwood Lumber Association. G. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Provide wood for miscellaneous framing, support or attachment of other work including bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: a. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. b. Grade: Standard grade Tight framing size lumber or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. H. Plywood: 1. Plywood Grading Rules: U.S. Department of Commerce, current edition of Product Standard PS -1 or APA PRP -108 Perfomnance Standards, graded and grade -marked by the American Plywood Association. ,r a. - : Softwood plywood construction and industrial: PS -1. b. Hardwood plywood: PS -51. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A153. J. Reference Standards, Finish Carpentry: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWT). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC). 4. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). K. Plastic Laminate shall conform to NEMA LD -3 for thickness, type and grade designation. L. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five years experience in finish carpentry installations similar to those shown and specified herein. M. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.04 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or 'Treated," or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Preservative Treated Wood shall be certified by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained, and conformance with specified standards. B. Pressure -treat above ground items with water-bome preservatives to comply with AWPB LP -2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment, support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing member less than 18" above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible, If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment, and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 1.05 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Fire -retardant treated wood shall be used in fire rated assemblies, as required to comply with governing codes and regulations, and as specified herein. B. Fire -retardant treated wood shall be certified by treating plant that fire retardant treatment materials comply with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces. 1. Lumber and plywood shall have a fire -retardant pressure treatment in combination with wood preservative treatment Each piece of lumber or plywood shall have a label stamped with indelible ink issued by an approved agency having a re-examination service from UL, stating the flame spread, fuel contributed, and smoke density of the lumber or lumber when tested in accordance with Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials, Standard Test Method, Subject 723, UL. a. Fire hazard classification for plywood shall be: Flame spread 15; fuel contributed 5-30; and smoke developed 0-15. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 b. Fire hazard classification for lumber shall be: Flame spread 25; fuel contributed 25; and smoke developed 0. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. B. Field measurements: Take field measurements to ascertain exact millwork sizes. Indicate exact dimensions on shop drawings. C. Do not install finish carpentry work until interior concrete and masonry work, and other wet operations are complete, the building is adequately ventilated, and proper temperature and humidity conditions can be maintained during and after installation. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery and Storage: Protect sheet materials from comers breaking and damaging surfaces, while unloading. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1. Forlumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between each course to provide air circulation. B. Deliver Finish Carpentry materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. 1. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials indoors, protected from weather. Maintain temperature between 55 deg. and 70 deg. F. 2. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Store in dry, conditioned space. C. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Materials, General: 1. Dimensions: a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions shall conform to industry standards established by the American Lumber Standards committee and the rules writing agencies. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Locations as shown on Drawings. B. LUMBER: 1. Provide as shown on Drawings. 2. Moisture content 19 percent maximum at time of permanent closing -in of building or structure, for lumber 2" or less nominal thickness. 3. Surfacing: Surface 4 sides (S48), unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Grade: Standard grade and better. 5. Species: Species of specified grade. C. PLYWOOD: 1. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Association (APA) "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural -Use Panels. Delaminated panels shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. 2. Trademarle Factory -mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 3. APA Performance -Rated Panels: Where construction panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance - Rated Panels compiying with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness. a. Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing. 1) Exposure Durability Classification: Exposure. 2) Span Rating: 40/20, 19/32 - inch thick minimum, unless indicated otherwise. Use where 518 -inch plywood is indicated on drawings. 3) Span Rating: 32116, 15132 -inch thick where 2 -inch plywood is indicated on drawings, unless shown otherwise. 4) Faces: APA -BC, minimum. b. Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Plywood Sheathing, where shown on drawings. 1) Plywood sheathing shall comply with the requirements of PS - 1 for Structural I grade panels. 2) Plywood sheathing shall have a minimum thickness of 15/32" with a span rating of 32116, unless shown otherwise. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3) Panels shall be 4' wide, not less than 8' long, with square edges. c. Exterior Grade plywood: APA C -C Plugged, PS -1, Group 1, Exterior. 1) Provide exterior grade plywood where shown on Structural drawings. d. Bolts: ASTM A307. 4. Plywood Backing Panels: Unless noted otherwise, for mounting electrical or telephone equipment provide plywood panels with grade designation, APA C -D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 23/32". 5. Medium Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood: Plywood shall be exterior type with one face of medium density (resin -treated fiber) overlay as described in U.S. Product Standard AS -1. Each panel to be identified with APA Trademark. a. Plywood is manufactured with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, B - Grade face and back veneers and C -Grade inner plies. b. Class 111 (C) Category, unless shown otherwise. �_ c. Thickness: 3/4 inch, unless shown otherwise. 6. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): interior grade homogeneous wood based panel manufactured from softwood fibers, combined with synthetic resin. 7. Fire -Retardant Treated Wood: Provide in fire rated assemblies and as shown on Drawings. Refer to Par. 1.05 of this Section. 8. Preservative Treated Wood: Provide as required. Refer to Par. 1.04 of this Section. D. FASTENERS: 1. Rough Hardware: Conform to ASTM and Federal Standard Specifications. Zinc coated steel unless otherwise shown or specified. a. Bolts: FS FF -B -575C. b. Nuts: FS FF -N -836C. c. Expansion Shields: FS FF -B-561 C. d. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF -B-561 C. e. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B -588C. f. Wood Screws: FS FF -S-111 C. g. Nails and Staples: FS FF -N -105B (3). CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2008 2. Wood Connectors: Provide galvanized joist hangers, shoes, column bases and caps and other connectors as required for a complete job and as shown on Drawings. d. Simpson Strong -Tie http://www.iccsafe.org/esreports11211.pdf, or equal, identified by ICBG Evaluation Report number. 2.02 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Specified Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are named in this Section to establish a standard of quality. All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. No substitutions are allowed on this Project, unless so specified. B. Materials: 1. Hardwood lumber for transparent finish shall be clear, with no visible defects, and well matched for color and grain. a. Interior exposed millwork and trim shown on Drawings as hardwood shall be vertical grain Red Oak. 2. Softwood bomber DOC PS 20-94, "American Softwood Lumber Standard". l a. Typical: Ponderosa Pine, Idaho White Pine, Sugar Pine or Northern White Pine. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1-95, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood". 4. Particle board shall conform to the requirements of Interim Standard for Mat - Formed Wood Particle Board by the National Particle Board Association, Type 2, Density A (high density) and Class 2. 5. Plastic Laminate: General purpose Type GP 50, complying with NEMA LD -3- 1995, including latest revisions. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pionite Decorative Laminates. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. b. Colors and Patterns: As shown on Drawings. 6. Solid Surfacing Material: Homogenous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or 6, without a precoated finish. a. Acceptable Manufacturer. "Corian" by DuPont Polymers NO SUBSTITUTIONS. b. Size: 112" thick. c. Color. "Black Quartz" selected from the "Jewel" Series. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. --Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 d. Sealant: G.E. Silicone #1700 by General Electric. Color: Black. 7. Sanitary Paneling: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, 3/32" thick, white color, complying with USDA and FDA requirements. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Kemlite Corp.: "Glasbord-P" with "Surfaseal" finish. 2) Lasco Panel Products: "LascoBoard Sta-Clean". b. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl molding strips, suitable for board use. c. Mold and mildew resistant adhesive for securing sanitary paneling as recommended by the paneling manufacturer. C. Fabrication: 1. Millwork shall be fabricated in the shop in largest units possible and delivered to the Protect site for installation. Where necessary to fit units at the site, allowance shall be made for cutting and fitting. 2. Not all details of millwork are shown on the Drawings. The fabricator shall utilize .the most advantageous manufacturing processes to achieve the quality of millwork indicated herein by reference to AWI Quality Standards. 3. Fabricate standing and running trim in accordance with AWI Section 300, Custom Grade, including closet hook strips and miscellaneous trim. 4. Fabricate plastic laminate veneered millwork including Employee Lounge countertop in accordance with AWI Section 400, Premium Grade. a. Provide balancing or back-up sheet for plastic laminate veneered tops and other concealed surfaces. 5. Fabricate solid surfacing lavatory tops in accordance with WIC Section 17D, Premium Grade. a. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop -applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surfacing manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, sealants, fabrication and finishing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. CARPENTRY Section 06100 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 8. Verify measurements at the building and provide necessary closures and trim to fit the items enclosing walls, C. Provide other trades with information necessary for proper completion of related work. D. Condition work to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing Finish Carpentry. 3.02 INSTALLATION — ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Discard units of material with defects that might impair quality of work, and units that are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. E. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. fhstall fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. F. For exterior canopies, fascia, soffit and other construction attached to and projecting from the building (As applicable), provide fire retardant treated blocking, framing lumber and plywood as indicated or as required by all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances and by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire -treated lumber and plywood shall conform to paragraph 1.05 as specified in this Section. G. Roof deck, floor and wall panels shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for nailing, panel joint spacing. Panel joint spacing shall be a minimum of 1/8" unless otherwise indicated by panel manufacturer. H. Wood Nailers and Blocking: 1. Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. 2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. I. Plywood Wall Sheathing: 1. Provide plywood wall sheathing where shown. Install horizontally or vertically using panels continuous over 2 or more spans. CARPENTRY Section 06100 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Apply face grain across studs where single finish is shown to be applied directly to sheathing. 3. Install interior plywood over interior studs in full height sheets with tight butted joints. Sand joints if required to obtain joints without offsets. 3.03 INSTALLATION — FINISH CARPENTRY A. Work shall be erected plumb, true and square in a substantial manner. Finished work shall be neatly installed, free of slivers, open joints, hammer and tool marks. Blind nail finished work insofar as possible, and set surface nails. B. Woodwork: Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop -fabricated or shop -cut to exact size. C. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at comers. D. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best over-all advantage, when installing job assembled woodwork items. E. Installation of Standing and Running Trim: 1. Trim and Moldings. a. Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10 feet. For longer runs, use only 1 (one) piece less than 10 feet in a straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members. Cope at returns and miter at comers. b. Attach securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. c. Nailing: Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nail heads for filling. d. Anchoring: Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. 2. Preparation for Finish: Clean woodwork and fill nail holes in preparation for finishes. Where woodwork is to receive a transparent finish, use matching wood filler. Refer to Section 09900 - Painting. F. Installation of Casework: 1. Anchor woodwork directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners as required for a complete installation. Use oval countersunk head fasteners and finishing washers for anchoring fixed base and storage cabinets to substrate. a. Provide grounds as necessary. Trim and finish cabinets with scribe members for a neat and finished installation. CARPENTRY Section 06100 -11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Furnish hardware as specified. Equip each cabinet door with cabinet hinges, magnetic catch and pull. Mount each drawer on drawer slides and provide with a pull. install adjustable standards and supports for adjustable shelves. 4. Where items specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, fumish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the items specified, subject to approval. G. Installation of Vanity Tops and Countertops: 1. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. 2. Attach vanity tops and countertops securely to blocking and provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and in -counter soap dispensers, as applicable. 3. Smooth cut edges of cutouts in plastic laminate work and coat with waterproof coating oradhesive. Scribe tops to walls. H. Installation of Sanitary Paneling: 1. Secure paneling to walls surrounding mop basins in janitor and utility closets as shown on Drawings. Apply vinyl molding strips to raw edges of paneling. Butt joints at intersecting walls and apply sealant bead full height of joints. I. Installation of Wood Doors: 1. Hang doors with hardware specified. Provide clearances at jambs and heads not to exceed 1/8" and at bottoms not to exceed 3/8", except where indicated to be undercut or where required to clear thresholds. 2. Install doors to operate easily and close accurately against stops. Doors shall engage positively with the strikes when doors are closed with moderate force. J. Installation of Finish Door Hardware: 1. Install finish hardware as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit lock and latch sets in their respective doors and remove before finishing of doors. Reinstall hardware after finishing of doors is completed. Upon completion: adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware. CARPENTRY Section 06100 -12 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 K. Miscellaneous Installation: 1. Install such items as toilet room accessories, miscellaneous specialties, and other items furnished by others requiring fasteners, cutting, trimming, and scribing of furnished materials or finished substrate. a. Install plumb, level, true and straight. b. Install per manufacturer's printed instructions and as shown in other Sections. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joiner for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extend not completed at shop -or prior to installation of woodwork. 7 E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration. END OF SECTION CARPENTRY Section 06100 -13 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 06600 FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Fiber Reinforced Plastic panels as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Substrate to receive FRP panels as indicated on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM lnteFnational (ASTM). a. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. b. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). c. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. International Building Code (IBC): 1. Chapter 7 - Fire Resistance Rated Construction. 2. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. 3. Chapter 26 - Plastic. B. FRP Panels: Class C per ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread: Less than 200. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450. C. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) Section 06600 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. B, Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed standard Warranty. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. InPro Corporation. See Vendor Contact List on Buzzsaw web site for contact information 2.02 MATERIALS A. See Notes on Sheet PPI of Building Plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, in locations shown on Drawings. B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches as required. Replace damaged work as directed by Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) Section 06600 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 END OF SECTION FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) Section 06600 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A Provide Building Insulation as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation, as applicable: 1. Unfaced blanket fiberglass insulation. 2. Flame Spread 25, foil faced fiberglass insulation. 3. Safing insulation. 4. Rigid board insulation. 5. Vapor Barrier (If shown on Drawings). 6. Moisture Barrier (If shown on Drawings). B. Rigid insulation that is a part of the roofing assembly is specified in Section 07500. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 03442 — Tilt -Up Wall Panels. 2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. 4. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation & Finish System. 5. Section 0750007510 07520 - Mechanically Fastened TPO Roofing over Wood Deck. 6. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM C612. b. ASTM C665. c. ASTM E84. d. ASTM E136. d. ASTM C578 - Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 7 - Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 14 - Exterior Walls. c. Chapter 26 - Plastic (Board insulation, as applicable). B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having INSULATION Section 07200 -1 KOHL's Department Store, inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. B. Protect materials from exposure to high temperatures, excessive exposure to sunlight, and contact with hot surfaces and materials. Refer to manufacturers' printed instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unfaced Blanket Batt Insulation: 1. Fiberglass blanketslbatts complying with ASTM C665, Type I, thickness as shown on the Drawings. B. Foil Faced Fiberglass Insulation: 1. Type III, Class A per ASTM C665, Flame Spread 25, Smoke Developed 50. C; Safing Insulation: 1. Semi-rigid mineral fiber blanket, 4.0 tbs. pcf density complying with ASTM C612, Class 1, thickness as shown on Drawings. D. Rigid Board Insulation: 1. Furred wall insulation: Fiberglass insulation board, conforming to ASTM 612, ASTM E84 and ASTM E136 (Noncombustible). a. Board: Insul-Shield IIS 225 unfaced, as manufactured by Johns Manville http:/lwww.jm.com/ 1) Thickness: 1 %", unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2) Flame/Smoke rating 25/50 or less. 2. Alternate Board Insulation: Extruded Polystyrene (EPS board), ICC Evaluation Report: ER -6069. a. Gold -Wall by Plymouth Foam, Plymouth, WI 53073, (800) 669-1176 http:/)www. plymouthfoam. corn/ 1) Size: 48" wide by 96" high or 48" high by 108" high, with taped seams. 2) Thickness 1 inch to 3 inch, as shown on Drawings. 3) System has integral vapor barrier. INSULATION Section 07200 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 4) Tape all seams with sheathing tape as manufactured by Intertape Polymer Group , or equivalent. A multi-purpose construction tape for permanent seaming and sealing of joints in foam insulation to secure lap edges preventing air infilteration and provide vapor barrier protection. E. Radiant and Vapor Barrier (If shown): Economy grade, single -sided foil facing comprised of 0.0003" aluminum foil bonded to 30 Ib. natural Kraft paper with a flame retardant adhesive, reinforced with tri -directional fiberglass scrim. 1. FSK Shield, Class A fire rating, as manufactured by Fi-Foil Company (800) 448- 3401 yrww.fi-foil.com/, or equivalent. 2. Foundation perimeter insulation: Extruded Polystyrene (EPS board). a. ASTM C578, Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum), square edges. F. Moisture barrier: Provide moisture barrier where instructed. 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed, for conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. C. Review safety precautions, proposed operating procedures and environmental requirements with the manufacturer's or supplier's representative before proceeding with the Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. D. Provide temporary supplementary support for walls over 8' -0" high until gypsum wallboard is installed. INSULATION Section 07200 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. Bond units to substrate using fasteners and mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and .support of units, per fastener manufacturers' printed recommendations. B. Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be covered unless otherwise shown. C. WALLS OVER 8 FEET HIGH, and where INSULATION THICKNESS is LESS than STUD DEPTH: Provide attachment using wire or metal straps as required and as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF RIGID BOARD INSULATION AT EXTERIOR MASONRY OR CONCRETE TILT -UP WALLS A. Apply insulation to interior side of exterior masonry or concrete tilt -up walls. Where furring is indicated on the drawings install between furring strips. 1. Comply with local codes for requirements. Q. Attach to masonry or concrete tilt -up walls with impaling pins. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF RADIANTNAPOR BARRIER AND MOISTURE BARRIER A. Comply with ASTM C727 "Standard Practice for Installation and Use of Reflective Insulation in Building Constructions", and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1. Install FSK Shield with Kraft paper facing the insulation, and the foil facing the applicator. a. Overlap layers a minimum of 1t2 inch. Tape joints with Fi-Foil Foil Tape. 2. Nail or staple 6 mil Polyethylene sheeting to the studs. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF BOARD INSULATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Install board insulation full height of foundation wall from top of footing to bottom of slab with remainder laid horizontally beneath the slab. 1. Thickness of the insulation shall be as shown on Drawings. B. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads to board insulation. C. Install boards on foundation wall or grade beam perimeter. Place boards by method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. D. Extend boards over expansion and control joints, unbonded to foundation two inches both sides of joint. Backfill carefully to prevent damage to insulation boards. 3.07 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Refer to Drawings for locations and additional information. INSULATION Section 07200 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Install noise insulation batts pressed firmly into position between metal studs. Fit snugly around wall penetrations, (e.g. junction boxes and receptacles), install continuous from floor to structure above and extend over ceilings where indicated on the Drawings. 3.08 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation from possible physical abuses, where possible by non -delayed installation of concealing work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. 3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Perform daily cleanup to collect all wrappings, empty containers, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner. END OF SECTION INSULATION Section 07200 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Expanded polystyrene insulation. 2. Acrylic modified cementitious finish system, 3. Cornices. 4. Flashing. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2. Section 07920 - Sealants. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE , r A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 7 - Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 14 - Exterior Walls. c. Chapter 28 - Plastic. B. Installer Qualifications: Single firm, approved in writing by system manufacturer, employing trained workers familiar with current installation methods and materials. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) Section 07240 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Application of the system shall be in ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F. and rising, and on unfrozen surfaces. 1. For installation in temperatures less than 40 degrees F, supplementary heat shall be provided. B. A minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F. shall be maintained for at least 24 hours after the installation of the system. Continue thereafter if necessary until materials have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS „r A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Sto Corp. htto:/Iwww.stocorp.coml 2. Dryvit Systems, Inc. http:/Mrww.dryvit.com 2.02 MATERIALS A. Surface Sealer As recommended by the manufacturer, compatible with the substrate to which is to be applied, prior to application of adhesives. B. Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer and designed to be compatible, both in bond strength and chemical structure, with the rigid insulation used and with the substrate to which it is adhered. C. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene, 0.9 lbs. pcf minimum density, complying with ASTM C578, Type I, less than 25 flame spread, and as follows: 1. Size: 2'-O" x 4'-0", thickness shall be within a tolerance of ± 1/16". 2. Edges shall be square within 1/16" over the length of the board. 3. Aged or cured by air drying or kiln drying for periods recommended by the manufacturer, to avoid shrinkage after installation of finished system. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) Section 07240 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. -.Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Base Coat Materials: 1. Typical: System manufacturer's standard, job -mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C150, Type I, white or natural color, and system manufacturer's standard polymer -based adhesive designed for use indicated. 2. Waterproof Conditions: At unprotected horizontal or near -horizontal surfaces, use manufacturer's recommended 2 -component fiber -reinforced acrylic -based waterproof base coat mixed with Portland cement. E. Standard Duty Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced open weave glass fiber fabric made from twisted multi -end strands, specifically treated for compatibility with base and finish coat materials. F. Ground Floor and High Impact applications: 1. Provide additional base coat reinforcement using Panzer' Mesh httn://www.alsecco.de/alseccoenglish/pd/mesh0402.odf as recommended by Dryvit manufacturer, or equivalent recommended by Sto Corp. Refer to manufacturer's details and installation instructions for additional information. G. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard factory -mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 1. Colors: Custom colors to match paint selections shown on Drawings, in the Color Legend. 2. Texture: The following textures are among the standard textures used for Kohl's Stores: a. Integral Colored Textured Coating: i. StoLit 1.0 (Sto), or Sandpebble Fine (Dryvit). b. Stone Finish: i. StoCreativ Granite (Sto), or TerraNeo (Dryvit). The product should be applied per manufacturers specifications and directions for required finish. 3. Refer to Color Legend on Drawings for colors and textures selected for this Project. 4. Final colors and textures shall match approved samples. H. Water. Clean, free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies and organic materials. !. Sheet Metal: Refer to Section 07600. 2.03 MIXING A Mix base and finish coats in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (E1FS) Section 07240 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from spatter and droppings by use of drop cloths, masking and similar methods. C. The surfaces to receive the EIFS shall be structurally sound, clean and dry, and free of warpage, residual moisture or damage from moisture. Surfaces shall be uniform, with no irregularities greater than 1/8 inch in 4'-0". Surfaces shall be inspected for compliance with installation of the EIFS: 1. Gypsum sheathing shall meet the requirements of ASTM C70 and shall be handled, installed, and protected in accordance with Gypsum Association standards and manufacturers requirements. 2. Concrete, masonry or plaster surfaces shall be properly cured and free of dirt, dust, oil, grease, mildew, fungus, Iaitance, efflorescence and all other contaminaflts. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install primed metal flashing at base of wall as shown on the Drawings, prior to installation of insulation board substrata. Refer to Section 07600 for installation requirements. B. Install EIFS in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Installation of Insulation Board: 1. Beginning at the base of the wall, apply boards horizontally (running bond pattern) in trowel applied adhesive, full board coverage, to the substrata. Apply sealers to masonry surfaces prior to applying adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply uniform pressure to board, butting joints tightly to provide flush, level surface for ensuing work. 3. Form reveals shown, level, plumb, true, and with sharp 90 -degree comers. D. Accessories: Install accessory items and expansion joints where shown in full bed of adhesive. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) Section 07240 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Base Coat and Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Trowel apply base coat to insulation board for full coverage, and immediately embed the reinforcing fabric in the wet base coat. Reinforcing fabric shall be continuous at comers and lapped at edges. Fabric texture shall telegraph through base coat yet be entirely coated. Edges and comers shall be smooth and clean, and entire application shall be free of wrinkles. 2. Waterproof Conditions: Apply waterproof base coat and standard reinforcing fabric to unprotected horizontal or near -horizontal conditions and extend down vertical surfaces minimum 4" or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Finish Coat After base coat has cured (8 to 10 hours), trowel apply finish coat over base coat and reinforcing fabric and when initial set has occurred, perform desired final texturing to match approved samples. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove debris and rubbish resulting from this work, from the site and leave adjacent construction clean. •tr 1.. ENO OF SECTION EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) Section 07240 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART 1- GENERAL. 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Firestopping as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceways through fire -rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 2. Blank openings through fire -rated vertical bafflers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 3. Openings and penetrations in fire -rated partitions or walls containing fire doors. 4. Openings around structural members that penetrate floors or wails. 5. Openings between structurally separate sections of wall or floors. 6. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies. 7. Expansion joints in walls and floors. 8. Safing slot gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls. B. Definitions: 1. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire -rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. 3. Section 07920 - Sealants. 4. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard. 5. Division 15 - Mechanical. 6. Division 16 - Electrical. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE F1RESTOPPING Section 07270 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. Test Requirements: ASTM E814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops". 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 7 - Fire Resistance Rated Construction. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. UL 1479, "Test for Through Penetration Fire Stops". b. UL 1479 "Fire Resistance Directory", latest edition. 1) Through -Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR). 2) Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV). 3) Through -Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ). 4)S t Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW). 5) Forming Materials (XHKU). 6) UL 2079, "Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems". c. UL 2079 "Fire Resistance Directory', latest edition. 1) Joint Systems (XHBN). 2) Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV). 3) Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW). 4) Forming Materials (XHKU). 4. All major building codes, as applicable: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 7. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the Firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacture's products per specified requirements. C. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial installation of Firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturers written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. D. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479 and UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. E. Proposed Firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. F. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live Toads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating a load bearing assembly. G. For those Firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturers engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994). H. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. r 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job -site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Schedule installation of Firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of Firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturers recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent Firestopping materials from contaminating adjacent surfaces. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Provide Manufacturer's signed Warranty for specified materials. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide Firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items penetrating the Firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the Firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each Firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the Firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire -resistance -rated systems. C. Firestopping Materials are either "cast -in-place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post installed." Provide cast -in-place Firestop devices prior to concrete placement. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: Products of the specific manufacturers are named in this Section, subject to compliance with through penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) and Joint Systems (XHBN) listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 1. HILTI, Inc., (800) 879-8000 htto: /www.us.hilti.com/holus/modulesfadfssel/adfs main.jsp 2. 3M, (888) 364-3577 http:Nwww.3m.comlusfarch gonstruct/firestoo/indexjhtml B. All products and materials used in the Project shall be listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory, and shall conform to the application specified. C. All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. D. Specified Systems: HILTI, for reference purposes only. 2.03 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use only Firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E814, or UL 2079 tested for specific fire -rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire -rating involved for each separate instance. FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Provide a Firestop system with "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. C. Provide a Firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS A. Cast -in place Firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast -In Place Firestop Device. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. C. Sealants or caulkingrmaterials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 3. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 4. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. D. Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. F. Non curing, re -penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. G. Wall opening protective materials for use with UL listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Hiiti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. H. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar. 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar. 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 1. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound. 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. J. Non curing, re -penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 65°FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. K. For blank openings made in fire -rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.05 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire -rated construction joints and other gaps, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray. 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 4. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Sealants or caulking materials used for openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 672 Firestop Spray. 2. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 4. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 -6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.06 THROUGH -PENETRATIONS FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Cast -in place Firestop devices for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast -In Place Firestop Device. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. C. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hiiti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 3. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 4. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. tr D. Intumescent'sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hiiti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 2. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. F. Non curing, re -penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. G. Wall opening protective materials for use with UL listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 H. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar. 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar. 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound. 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK. 3. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. J. Non curing, re -penetrable materials used for Targe sizelcomplex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. K. For blank openings made in fire -rated wail or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipet, conduits, or cables is expected, the following products are acceptable? 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK. 2. Equivalent products by 3M, listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which Firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by Firestopping materials. 4, Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of Firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRESTOPPING Section 07270 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast -in-place Firestop Devices with trade(s) responsible for the related work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. B. Ensure responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast -in-place Firestop devices without interferences. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install Firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturers instructions for installation of through -penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL Firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. 3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Examine sealed joints to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. C. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of Firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing Firestop systems already installed by other trades. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess Firestop materials and soiling as work progresses. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPP1NG Section 07270 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07500 MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Single Ply, Mechanically Fastened TPO Roofing System as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. TPO roofing over Main Roof and Mezzanine Roof, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. B. Roof Insulation: Refer to Par. 2.04 of this Section. C. Type of Installation: 1. Provide new roofing over new deck, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. D. Pre -Roofing Conference: Refer to Par. 1.04 of these Specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK 1 A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 01410 2. Section 05300 3. Section 07600 4. Section 07721 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References: - Testing and Inspection. - Steel Deck. - Flashing and Sheet Metal. - Roof Curbs. 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. Factory Mutual (FM). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 15 — Roof Assemblies and Roof Structures. b. Chapter 26 — Plastic. B. Regulatory Requirements: Roofing system shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Class A sheathing material for use in construction of Class A roofing assemblies. 1. UL 790 Class A roof covering. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -1 KOHLls Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Attach ALL roofing system materials (including roof insulation, roofing membrane, flashing, and other materials) as required to resist all wind uplift, wind lateral loading, and other wind force conditions which can be reasonably expected within the next twenty years. At a minimum, comply with the more stringent of the following standards and requirements: 1. All applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. 2. Factory Mutual Class 1-90 Wind Uplift Resistance Classification. 3. Underwriters Laboratories UL -58Q Class 90 Wind Uplift Resistance Classification. 4. The best standards of good practice. D. Submit proposed fastening details and product data for all conditions. Submit a Certificate stating that all roofing system construction complies with all applicable standards and requirements as required herein. E. Notify Owner's Representative a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of start of field work. In event that Owner provides a full-time Owner's Representative, do not perform work until Owner's Representative is present except as authorized in writing by Owner. r F. Schedule Roofing manufacturer's technical representative to be on site during first two days of membrane installation and two times per month during project duration. Manufacturers shall provide written report within five days of each inspection outlining all deficiencies in the completed installation and recommendations for corrective procedures. G. Applicator: 1. Approved by manufacturer of roofing system. 2. A single applicator with a minimum of five years previous successful experience in installations of systems similar to those specified herein. 3. Minimum five years experience in single -ply roofing with two years experience seaming system same as the one specified herein. 4. Be present at job site at all times when work is being performed. Supervise workers as required to ascertain workmanship, progress, and adherence to details. 5. Report to Owner's Representative daily. 6. Be responsible for schedule and coordination. 7. Have authority to make binding commitments upon Contractor in the field. H. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.04 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE A. The General Contractor with the Testing service shall organize and conduct a pre -roofing conference prior to the installation of the roofing system. Refer to Section 01410 — Testing and Inspection for additional information. B. Attendees shall include the General Contractor's superintendent, Owner's Representative, Roofing Manufacturer's representative, testing service inspector assigned to the project, roofing contractor, roof accessories subcontractor, installer of the substrate, HVAC subcontractor, plumbing subcontractor, electrical subcontractor and all contractors supplying work adjoining the roof system. C. Contractor shall submit a copy of a letter from the primary roofing materials manufacturer certifying that the roofing subcontractor is an approved applicator of the roof system. The letter shall also certify that all products and materials used in the roof system are compatible and acceptable to the manufacturer. The letter shall be signed by a corporate officer of the manufacturer. D. The testing service shall review and define the following during the pre -roofing conference: 1. The roofing installation schedule. 2. The existing site conditions. 3. Staging and sequencing of the roofing work. 4. How and where the materials are to be stored. 5. Roofing specifications, drawings and submittals. 6. Contract terms not of financial nature. 7. The roofing inspector's daily reports. 8. The mechanical fastening of insulation boards. 9. Perimeter, comer and field batten spacing (system dependent). 10. Perimeter, comer and field sheet layout, and fastener spacing and penetration (system dependent). 11. Seams and seaming techniques including placement of covers over T -joints. 12. Inside and outside comer base flashing details. 13 Metal edge terminations. 14 That phasing of roofing application is unacceptable. Roof sections shall be completed in their entirety, including penetration flashings prior to moving to another roof section. 15. Roof penetration details. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 16. The substrate, roof slope, drainage, parapets, terminations and nailers. 17. The Contractor shall limit foot and wheeled traffic on newly placed insulation and membrane to prevent crushing of insulation. 18. Placement of protective traffic pads: Additional layer of TPO membrane at walking areas as shown on Drawings. 19. Roof drain installation procedures. E. Roof Walk -Over: Conduct a roof walk -over and note the condition of the substrate noting the fastener and weld attachment method of the metal decking, the slope of the roof, low spots, roof membrane termination areas and the staging of roofing material storage on the roof surface. F. Prepare a report of the pre -roofing meeting including all items discussed and distribute to the following: 1. All Attendees (1 copy each). 2. Owner (1 copy). 3. Roofing Manufacturer (1 copy). 4. Roofing Contractor (1 copy). t- 1.05 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Store rolled goods on clean raised platforms. Store other materials in dry area, protected from water and direct sunlight, and maintain at a temperature of 50 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit (10 to 32 degrees Celsius). C. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow continuity of work without delay. D. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground, and free from moisture. Protect materials against damage. Keep all materials used in construction of the roofing free from moisture prior to and during application. Do not store in plastic bags which may create condensation within bags. E. Store roof insulation and separation membrane flat on pallets or dunnage at least 4 - inches (100mm) above the ground, roof, or deck and protect as necessary to keep dry. F. Handle all materials so as to prevent damage to roofing system components and completed roof system. G. Proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Protect all materials susceptible to moisture including, but not limited to, all roll goods, insulation, wood, and plywood in dry, above ground, watertight storage. Keep labels intact and legible, clearly showing the product, manufacturer, and other pertinent information. H. Materials becoming wet or damaged will be rejected and shall be removed from job MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 site immediately. Insulation found to be improperly stored at jobsite shall be considered wet at the discretion of Owner's Representative and removed from jobsite. I. Maintain products liable to degrade as a result of being frozen above 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees Celsius) in heated storage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Examine roofing deck to determine compliance with conditions under which roofing membrane is to be applied, as recommended by the roofing manufacturer. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply roofing in dry weather. 2. When ambient temperature is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit (16 degrees Celsius), expose only enough sensitive cements, sealants, and adhesives as required within a four hour period. 3. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Protection: ,T 1. Provide special protection and avoid traffic on completed areas of membrane installation. 2. Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during handling of roof materials. 3. Take precautions as required to protect adjacent work and structures. 4. Protect building, paved areas, service drives, lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work. Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the roofing application. 5. Contractor shall take precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such material may sift into the building. Contractor shall provide labor and materials to construct, maintain and remove necessary temporary enclosures to prevent dust or debris in the construction area(s) from entering the remainder of the building. 6. Do not overload the building, either by use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials. 7. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 8. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application. Remove debris at the completion of each day's work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain. 9. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original condition upon completion of the work. D. Emergency Equipment Maintain on site equipment necessary to apply emergency temporary edge seal in event of sudden storms or inclement weather. E. Restrictions: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01010 - Summary of Work on use of site. 2. Smoking is prohibited on roof areas or in existing buildings. 3. Maintain facility and all utility services in a functional condition. F. Adhesives, primer, and caulks as indicated may be extremely flammable and/or toxic. Follow precautionssifidicated on can and carton labels. 1 G. Surface to be bonded shall be dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are usually considered to be smooth, solid masonry, wood and meta!, plus insulation board fastened to the specific manufacturer's recommendations for receiving adhered roofing membranes and accepted by the roofing manufacturer for adhered applications of the membrane. H_ All fasteners are recommended to be installed with a depth -sensing screw gun to prevent over -driving or under -driving. An adapter tool shall be used for the installation of specialized fasteners. I. Block off or shut down positive pressure building ventilation systems during application to prevent sheet from billowing during application. J. Excessive patching as a result of damage to the membrane, or caused by faulty installation, may require total recover in those areas. K. Job preparation should always include provision to ensure positive drainage in all areas. L. For buildings that are subject to positive pressurization from wind or from air handling systems below the deck during construction, consult Roofing manufacturer for suitability of application and possible design enhancement requirements. M. Install all materials in accordance with Roofing manufacturers current written specifications and details. Make no deviations without Roofing manufacturers prior written approval. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.07 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Install new roof membrane system immediately after completion of insulation/separation layer installation. B. Schedule work as required to prevent traffic and material handling over completed work. C. Do not expose new material to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. See additional roof protection provisions herein. D. Notify Owner's Representative at least two hours prior to installing temporary water cut off edge seal at end of day's work. 1.08 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEEE A. Upon successful completion, final inspection and acceptance of the installation, the following Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty shall be issued to the Owner 1. Manufacturer of the single -ply membrane roof system shall provide to Owner a 15 year written 'Total System' Material and Labor Warranty. The warranty shall guarantee against all material defects and faulty workmanship of all materials including but not limited to, insulation, installed by the roofing contractor es required by these specifications for the full duration of the warranty. The warranty must carry a wind uplift coverage of a peak gust wind speed measured at ground level, as specified in Par. 1.03 — Quality Assurance. The warranty shall commence upon the Final Acceptance of the roofing system. B. Contractor's Guarantee: Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee for a period of two years after Final Acceptance by Owner, covering all repairs required to correct all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and to otherwise maintain the roof in a watertight condition and to correct all other defects without regard to watertightness. Make repairs promptly on notification and at no expense to Owner. C. The Owner has the right, in the case of emergency at all time during the warranty period and without invalidating the warranty, to make temporary repairs that are required in order to protect the building and the contents of the building from damage due to the roof leaking. PART 2- PRODLJCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. CARLISLE Syntec Systems jtttp:llwww.carlisle-syntec.coml 2. JOHNS MANVILLE bijtp://www.jm.com/ MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.02 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM A. Membrane Roofing Systems: .045 thick reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin membrane, white in color. Membrane must measure a nominal 15 mils over scrim (No exceptions). 1. "Sure -Weld "as manufactured by Carlisle Syntec http:/Iwww.carlisle- syntec. co m/docu ments/ResLib/SWM F%20U L%20CLASS%20A. odf 2. "UltraGard" SRT -45 as manufactured by Johns Manville http://www.jm.com/roofing systems1132.htm 2.03 RELATED MATERIALS A. Membrane Fasteners and Plates: Minimum 2-3/8" diameter barbed seam plate and #15 fastener, or as recommended by roofing manufacturer. B. Flashing: Minimum 45 mil, reinforced or non -reinforced flashing membrane as furnished by roofing manufacturer, white in color. C. Bonding Adhesive: Furnished by roofing manufacturer for substrate. D. Caulks: Roofing manufacturer's approved sealant to seal penetrations through the membrane system br miscellaneous caulking applications that come in contact with roof systen components. E. Lap/Seam Sealant: As furnished by roofing manufacturer for this system. F. Water Cut-off Mastic: As fumished by roofing manufacturer for this system. G. Inside Comers and Outside Comers and Molded Pipe Flashings: White molded pipe flashings as furnished by roofing manufacturer for this system. H. Walkway Pads: TAO membrane, as approved by roofing manufacturer. I, Splash Blocks (As applicable): Precast concrete splash blocks splayed to provide positive drainage away from building face; size as shown on Drawings. J. Other miscellaneous materials shall be of the best grade available and approved in writing by roof system manufacturer for the specific application. 2.04 ROOF INSULATION A. Contractor shall obtain Roofing Manufacturer's approval" prior to ordering Roof Insulation. B. Roof Insulation shall be Polyisocyanurate conforming to ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board, Class I, UL Class A rating and Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1 approval. Polyisocyanurate core shall be reinforced with glass fibers. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TRO ROOFING Section 07500 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall have a minimum LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 19, based on ASTM C1303. Insulation shall be Sure -Seal by Carlisle www�carlisle-syntec.com, Johns Manville ISO 1 www.johnsmanville.com, or as recommended by Roofing Manufacturer. 1. Provide 2 (two) layers of insulation. Stagger joints between layers. 2. Provide 1" rigid insulation at all preformed curbs without factory -installed insulation. D. Tapered Roof Insulation shall be Carlisle SynTec or Johns Manville Fesco Tapered System, or as recommended by Roofing Manufacturer. E. All insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck. Provide fasteners at required spacing using pattern approved by manufacturer, or more fasteners as required by project conditions, substrate construction, or requirements of FM, authority having jurisdiction, and Roofing Manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Insulation joints shall be 1/4" or Tess in width. Repair all joints wider than 1/4" width insulation. Stagger all joints. G. Broken comers shall be cut out and replaced with sections of insulation Targe enough to be supported on two or more deck flutes. t* H. Refer to drawings for locations and additional information. 2.05 METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS A. Carlisle Sure -Seal SecurEdge 200: a snap -on edge system consisting of a 24 gauge galvanized metal water dam and .040", .050" or .063" thick Kynar 500, clear and colored anodized finish or 24 gauge steel, Kynar 500 finish. Metal fascia color shall be as designated by the Owners Representative. B. Carlisle Sure -Seal SecurEdge Coping: incorporates a 20 gauge anchor cleat with 4 pre -slotted holes, a concealed joint cover and 10 foot continuous sections of coping cap; can accommodate minimum 5 Inch wide parapet walls. Metal coping cap color shall be as designated by the Owner's Representative. C. Carlisle Sure -Seal Termination Bar. a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum bar pre -punched 6 inches on center, incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and provide increased stability for membrane terminations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform entire work of this Section in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to trades involved. B. Adhere to local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. When conflict exists, the more restrictive document shall govern. C. Follow insurance underwriter's requirements acceptable for use with specified MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No, 3079 October 12, 2006 products or systems. D. Consider selected roof system manufacturer's current technical specifications a part of this Specification and use as a reference for specific application procedures and recommendations. E. Mechanically fasten both the reinforced membrane and insulation/separation underlayment through the insulation into the roof deck. F. Refer to Roofing manufacturer's technical specifications for proper fastener selection and spacing in accordance with specific deck types and appropriate roll width for field of roof and perimeters. 3.02 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A. Examine roof areas for conditions that would prevent proper application of roofing. B. Verify that wood nailers are properly installed to receive roofing system. C. Examine roof deck and related surfaces, and verify that there are no conditions such as inadequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, ridges, or other conditions, which would prevent the satisfactory installation of the roofing system. D. Correct or completefconditions requiring correction or completion prior to installation of roofing systbm. Notify Owners Representative in writing of unacceptable conditions. E. Verify location of all interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or. similar obstructions. Perform al! work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above- mentioned items. F. Verify that separation membrane has been properly installed in the areas in accordance with requirements of roofing manufacturer for conformance to FM 1-90 and warranty requirements. G. Start of work under this Section constitutes acceptance of substrate and site conditions. H. Verify: 1. Deck and substrates are clean, smooth, and free from depressions, waves, projections, defects, and damage. 2. Surfaces in contact with single -ply material are free from bitumen, grease, oil, or other foreign material. 3. Surfaces in contact with roofing membrane or separator sheet are free from sharp edges, fins, or projections. 4. AH materials are completely dry and free from ice and snow, including substrate, deck, insulation, and roofing membrane as applicable. Confirm dryness by moisture meter and demonstrate to Owner's Representative. 5. Ail roof equipment, openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, and blocking MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 members are solidly and properly set. 6. Ali mechanical and electrical work to be covered has been installed, tested, and approved. 7. Work has been completed where possible for all other trades that require work or traffic on the roofing area. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION A. All roof insulation shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of Factory Mutual (FM), Roof Insulation manufacturer, and Roofing Membrane manufacturer. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Roofing Membrane: 1. Install roof membrane in accordance with roofing manufacturer's most recently published specification and installation instructions. Cut sheets to maximum size possible in order to minimize seams. 2. Position membrane over substrate without stretching membrane. Allow membrane4to relax for one-half hour before bonding, fastening, welding, and flashing. 3. Begin installation of roofing system at the lowest point of the project area and work to the highest point to prevent backwater laps. This will include completion of all flashings, terminations, and seals on a daily basis. 4. Execute work so membrane can be temporarily sealed on a down slope surface at the end of each day with nite-seal in accordance with the detail drawings. 5. Install mechanically fastened roofing system over the field of the roof with the length of the sheets parallel to the long dimension of the roof. 6. Position the roof membrane perimeter sheet along the perimeter of the roof over the acceptable substrate. Perimeter membrane width and securement shall be in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommended procedures for building height and location. Sheet placement shall permit edge, overlaps, and fastening as required by manufacturer. 7. Secure the edge of the sheet with specified fasteners and plates spaced in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommended fastening pattern for the specific substrate, building height, and location. Fastener pattern shall not exceed 12 -inches (300mm) on center. Do not overdrive the seam fasteners. Overdriving, which causes wrinkling of the membrane, is unacceptable and shall be corrected prior to acceptance. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. --Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 8. Work shall progress across the roof deck with Rooting manufacturer's recommended minimum overlap provided at the previously secured sheet edge. Secure opposite length of the sheet with fasteners and plates, and overlap accordingly. B. Membrane Splicing: 1. Membrane lap splices for membrane overlaps along the length of the membrane shall be as necessary to achieve proper weld. Minimum distance between the edge of the fastening plate and edge of the membrane shall be 1/2 -inches (13mm), minimum. Splices at end roll overlaps (width of the membrane) shall be 6 -inches (150mm) wide, minimum. Plan sheet layout so that end roll overlaps can be stripped in with a continuous membrane head lap (minimum 18 -inches {450mm} wide). 2. Allow top sheet to fall freely into place over bottom ply without wrinkling or stretching. 3. Surfaces to be welded must be cleaned, primed and dirt -free. Remove excessive dirt by washing with a detergent Rinse thoroughly, allow to dry, and then wipe surface with manufacturer's solvent/cleaner. 4. Use automatic hot air welding equipment approved by roof system manufactuper for all field seams. Perform small work and repairs using hand webers. Roof system manufacturer's representative shall be on site at start of project to supervise welding operations and to inspect and approve welded seams. 5. Probe all laps each day to verify that welder set-up is effective. Allow membrane to cool. In addition, perform random lap test sample checks (including checks at start of each day) to verify peel strength. Caulk cut edges by applying manufacturer's seam caulk. C. Flashing: 1. Install flashing at all roof penetrations, interruptions, and roof intersections including roof edges with vertical or sloped surfaces, in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommended procedures and the detail drawings. 2. Raise/modify all curbs, projections, and risewall conditions as required to accommodate roofing. 3. Apply Roofing manufacturer's bonding adhesive to both underside of flashing and surface to which it is to be bonded, at a rate of approximately one gallon (3,8 liter) per 50 square feet (4.6 m2) of surface coverage. 4. Do not apply bonding adhesive to that portion of flashing that overlaps onto itself. Use hot-air welding throughout the system where membrane overlaps itself. MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -12 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 5. Allow bonding adhesive to dry to finger touch until it does not string or stick to a dry finger. Roll the flashing into dry adhesive. Take care to assure that flashing does not bridge where there is a change of direction. 6. Mechanically top fasten all flashing under or through appropriate counterflashing with approved fasteners as shown in detail drawings. 7. Install flashings for vents, pipe, soil vents, and other round projections in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommendations and the detail drawings. 8. Install preformed flashing membrane as required to form a continuous membrane seal in each comer or change in plane. D. Flashing - Other Penetrations: 1. General: a. Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane in accordance with the Roofing manufacturer's recommended procedure. b. Flashing seal must be made directly to the penetration passing through the membrane system. T 2. Pipet, -Round Supports, etc.: a. Flash pipes with molded pipe flashings where their installation is possible. b. Where molded pipe flashings cannot be installed, use factory fabricated reinforced split pipe seals. c. After pipe flashing is installed, secure with steel draw band and seal top edge with sealant. E. Daily Seal: 1. Ensure that water does not flow beneath completed sections of membrane system. This will include completion of all flashings, terminations, and daily seals. When possible, install starting at the highest point of the project area, working to the lowest point. 2. Temporarily seal loose membrane edge with Roofing manufacturer's water cut-off sealant. Exercise caution to ensure that membrane is not temporarily sealed in such a manner as to promote water migration below the membrane or impede drainage. 3. Install daily night seals by extending the roof membrane beyond the insulation and sealing to existing roof surface. 4. When work is resumed, remove and dispose of membrane where asphalt or other sealants were previously applied before resuming installation. 3.05 CLEANING MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -13 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Exterior: Remove debris, adhesives, and sealant from surfaces. B. Interior: Remove all work related dirt, debris, bitumen, drippage, spills, etc. END OF SECTION r MECHANICALLY FASTENED TPO ROOFING Section 07500 -14 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07531 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Single Ply, Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing System as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. EPDM roofing over Entry Canopy, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. B. Roof Insulation: Refer to Par. 2.03 of this Section. C. Type of Installation: 1. Provide new roofing over metal deck, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. D. Pre -Roofing Conference: Refer to Par. 1.04 of these Specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK ST A Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01410 2. Section 05300 3. Section 07200 - 4. Section 07800 - Testing and Inspection. - Steel Deck. Insulation. - Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Factory Mutual (FM). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 5. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 15 — Roof Assemblies and Roof Structures. b. Chapter 26 — Plastic. B. Regulatory Requirements: Roofing system shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Class A sheathing material for use In construction of Class A roofing assemblies. 1. UL 790 Class A roof covering. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Attach ALL roofing system materials as required to resist all wind uplift, wind lateral loading, and other wind force conditions, which can be reasonably expected within the next twenty years. At a minimum, comply with the more stringent of the following standards and requirements: 1. All applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations. 2. Factory Mutual Class 1-90 Wind Uplift Resistance Classification. 3. Underwriters Laboratories UL -580 Class 90 Wind Uplift Resistance Classification. 4. The best standards of good practice. D. Submit proposed fastening details and product data for all conditions. Submit a Certificate stating that all roofing system construction complies with all applicable standards and requirements as required herein. E. Notify Owner's Representative a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of start of field work. In event that Owner provides a full-time Owner's Representative, do not perform work until Owner's Representative is present except as authorized in writing by Owner. F. Schedule Roofing manufacturer's technical representative to be on site during first two days of membrane installation and two times per month during project duration. Manufacturers shall provide written report within five days of each inspection outlining all deficiencies in the completed installation and recommendations for corrective procedures. G. Applicator. 1. Approved by manufacturer of roofing system, 2. A single applicator with a minimum of five years previous successful experience in installations of systems similar to those specified herein. 3. Minimum five years experience in single -ply roofing with two years experience seaming system same as the one specified herein. 4. Be present at job site at all times when work is being performed. Supervise workers as required to ascertain workmanship, progress, and adherence to details. 5. Report to Owner's Representative daily. 6. Be responsible for schedule and coordination. 7. Have authority to make binding commitments upon Contractor in the field. H. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.04 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE A. The General Contractor with the Testing service shall organize and conduct a pre -roofing conference prior to the installation of the roofing system. Refer to Section 01410 — Testing and Inspection for additional information. B. Attendees shall include the General Contractors superintendent, Owner's Representative, Roofing Manufacturer's representative, testing service inspector assigned to the project, roofing contractor, roof accessories subcontractor, installer of the substrate, HVAC subcontractor, plumbing subcontractor, electrical subcontractor and all contractors supplying work adjoining the roof system. C. Contractor shall submit a copy of a letter from the primary roofing materials manufacturer certifying that the roofing subcontractor is an approved applicator of the roof system. The letter shall also certify that all products and materials used in the roof system are compatible and acceptable to the manufacturer. The letter shall be signed by a corporate officer of the manufacturer. D. The testing service shall review and define the following during the pre -roofing conference: 1. The roofing installation schedule. 2. The existing site conditions. ,. 3. Staging and sequencing of the roofing work. 4. How and where the materials are to be stored. 5. Roofing specifications, drawings and submittals. 6. Contract terms not of financial nature. 7. The roofing inspector's daily reports. 8. The mechanical fastening of insulation boards. 9. Perimeter, comer and field batten spacing (system dependent). 10. Perimeter, comer and field sheet layout, and fastener spacing and penetration (system dependent). 11. Seams and seaming techniques including placement of covers over T -joints. 12. Inside and outside comer base flashing details. 13. Metal edge terminations. 14. That phasing of roofing application is unacceptable. Roof sections shall be completed in their entirety, including penetration flashings prior to moving to another roof section. 15. Roof penetration details. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 16. The substrate, roof slope, drainage, parapets, terminations and nailers. 17. The Contractor shall limit foot and wheeled traffic on newly placed insulation and membrane to prevent crushing of insulation. 18. Placement of protective traffic pads: Additional layer of EPDM membrane at walking areas as shown on Drawings. 19. Roof drain installation procedures. E. Roof Walk -Over. Conduct a roof walk -over and note the condition of the substrate noting the fastener and weld attachment method of the metal decking, the slope of the roof, low spots, roof membrane termination areas and the staging of roofing material storage on the roof surface. F. Prepare a report of the pre -roofing meeting including all items discussed and distribute to the following: 1. All Attendees (1 copy each). 2. Owner (1 copy). 3. Roofing Manufacturer (1 copy). 4. Roofing Contractor (1 copy). 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Store rolled goods on clean raised platforms. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life. C. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow continuity of work without delay. D. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground, and free from moisture. Protect materials against damage. Keep all materials used in construction of the roofing free from moisture prior to and during application. Do not store in plastic bags, which may create condensation within bags. E. Store roof insulation and separation membrane flat on pallets or dunnage at least 4 inches (100mm) above the ground, roof, or deck and protect as necessary to keep dry. F. Handle all materials so as to prevent damage to roofing system components and completed roof system. G. Proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Protect all materials susceptible to moisture including, but not limited to, all roll goods, insulation, wood, and plywood in dry, above ground, watertight storage. Keep labels intact and legible, clearly showing the product, manufacturer, and other pertinent information. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 H. Materials becoming wet or damaged will be rejected and shall be removed from job site immediately. Insulation found to be improperly stored at jobsite shall be considered wet at the discretion of Owner's Representative and removed from jobsite, 1. Maintain products liable to degrade as a result of being frozen above 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees Celsius) in heated storage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Examine roofing deck to determine compliance with conditions under which roofing membrane is to be applied, as recommended by the roofing manufacturer. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply roofing in dry weather. 2. When ambient temperature is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit (16 degrees Celsius), expose only enough sensitive cements, sealants, and adhesives as required within a four hour period. 3. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees Fahrenheit C. Protection: r 1. Provide special protection and avoid traffic on completed areas of membrane installation. 2. Restore to original condition or replace work or materials damaged during handling of roof materials. 3. Take precautions as required to protect adjacent work and structures. 4. Protect building, paved areas, service drives, lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work. Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the roofing application. 5. Do not overload the building, either by use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials. 6. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. 7. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application. Remove debris at the completion of each day's work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain. 8. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and retum the job site to its original EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 condition upon completion of the work. D. Emergency Equipment: Maintain on site equipment necessary to apply emergency temporary edge seal in event of sudden storms or inclement weather. E. Restrictions: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01010 - Summary of Work on use of site. 2. Smoking is prohibited on roof areas or in existing buildings. 3. Maintain facility and all utility services in a functional condition. F. Adhesives, primer, and caulks as indicated may be extremely flammable and/or toxic. Follow precautions indicated on can and carton labels. G. Surface to be bonded shall be dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are usually considered to be smooth, solid masonry, wood and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific manufacturers recommendations for receiving adhered roofing membranes and accepted by the membrane manufacturer for adhered applications of the membrane. H. All fasteners are r commended to be installed with a depth -sensing screw gun to prevent overdriving or under driving. An adapter tool shall be used for the installation of specialized fasteners. I. Block off or shut down positive pressure building ventilation systems during application to prevent sheet from billowing during application. J. Excessive patching as a result of damage to the membrane, or caused by faulty installation, may require total recover in those areas. K. Job preparation should always include provision to ensure positive drainage in all areas. L. For buildings that are subject to positive pressurization from wind or from air handling systems below the deck during construction, consult Roofing Manufacturer for suitability of application and possible design enhancement requirements. M. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and application of materials. N. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water. O. Install all materials in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's current written specifications and details. Make no deviations without Roofing manufacturer's prior written approval. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.07 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Install new roof membrane system immediately after completion of insulation/separation layer installation. B. Schedule work as required to prevent traffic and material handling over completed work. C. Do not expose new material to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. See additional roof protection provisions herein. D. Notify Owner's Representative at least two hours prior to installing temporary water cut off edge seal at end of day's work. 1.08 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Upon successful completion, final inspection and acceptance of the installation, the following Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty shall be issued to the Owner: 1. Manufacturer of the single -ply membrane roof system shall provide to Owner a 15 year written "Golden Seal Total System" Materia! and Labor Warranty. The warranty shall guarantee against all material defects and faulty workmanship of all materials including but not limited to, insulation, Installed by the roofing contractor as required by these specifications for the full duration of the warranty. The warranty must carry a wind uplift coverage of a peak gust wind speed measured at ground level, as specified in Par. 1.03 - Quality Assurance. The warranty shall commence upon the Final Acceptance of the roofing system. B. Contractor's Guarantee: Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee for a period of two years after Final Acceptance by Owner, covering all repairs required to correct all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and to otherwise maintain the roof in a watertight condition and to correct all other defects without regard to watertightness. Make repairs promptly on notification and at no expense to Owner. C. The Owner has the right, in the case of emergency at all time during the warranty period and without invalidating the warranty, to make temporary repairs that are required in order to protect the building and the contents of the building from damage due to the roof leaking. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. NO SUBSTITUTIONS will be allowed on this Project. 1. CARLISLE Syntec Systems http:Itwww.carlisle-syntec.coml 2.02 FULLY ADHERED EPDM ROOFING SYSTEM A. Carlisle Fully Adhered Roofing System: EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531- 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Provide Fully Adhered Sure -White 0.060 inch non -reinforced EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer) in the largest sheet possible. The membrane shall conform to the minimum physical properties of ASTM D4637. 2.03 ROOF INSULATION A. Contractor shall obtain Roofing Manufacturer's approval prior to ordering Roof Insulation. B. Roof Insulation shall be Polyisocyanurate conforming to ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board, Class I, UL Class A rating and Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1 approval. Polyisocyanurate core shall be reinforced with glass fibers. C. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall have a minimum LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) value of 19, based on ASTM C1303. Insulation shall be Sure -Seal by Carlisle www.carlisle-syntec.com, or as recommended by Roofing Manufacturer. 1. Provide 2 (two) layers of insulation. Stagger joints between layers. 2. Provide 1" rigid insulation at all preformed curbs without factory -installed insulation. D. Tapered Roof Insulation shall be Carlisle Sure -Seal ISO, or as recommended by Roofing McFnbrane Manufacturer. E. Cover Board: 1. Where required, provide glass mat water resistant gypsum core panels, minimum 1/4" thick. Provide 5/8" thick fire rated panels in fire rated roof assemblies, or as required by Authority having jurisdiction. Cover Board shall be "Dens -Deck" as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corporation. F. Insulation joints shall be 1/4" or less in width. Repair all joints wider than 1/4" width insulation. Stagger all joints. G. Broken corners shall be cut out and replaced with sections of insulation large enough to be supported on two or more deck flutes. H. Refer to drawings for locations and additional information. 2.04 ADHESIVES AND CLEANERS A. Bonding Adhesive: Sure -Seal 90-8-30A or B-500 Latex Based. B. Splicing Cement: Sure -White Splicing Cement. C. Splice Tape and Primer: Sure -Seal SecurTAPE and HP -250 or LV -600 Primer. D. Cleaning Solvent: Sure -White Splice Cleaner and Sure -Seal Weathered Membrane Cleaner. E. Internal seam sealant: Sure -Seal In -Seam Sealant (Used with adhesive splices only). EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 F. External seam sealant: Sure -White Lap Sealant. G. Sealer: Sure -Sea! Pourable Sealer. H. insulation adhesive: Sure -Seal FAST Adhesive. 2.05 FASTENERS AND PLATES A. To be used for mechanical attachment of insulation and to provide additional membrane securement: 1. InsulFast Fasteners: A threaded #12 fastener with #3 phillips head used for insulation attachment into steel or wood decks. 2. Insulation Fastening Plates: A 3 inch diameter FM approved metal plate used for insulation attachment. 2.06 METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS A. Carlisle Sure -Seal SecurEdge 200: a snap -on edge system consisting of a 24 gauge galvanized metal water dam and .040°, .050° or .063" thick Kynar 500, clear and colored anodized finish or 24 gauge steel, Kynar 500 finish. Metal fascia color shall be as designated by theOwner's Representative. 1, B. Carlisle Sure -Seal SecurEdge Coping: incorporates a 20 gauge anchor cleat with 4 pre -slotted holes, a concealed joint cover and 10 foot continuous sections of coping cap; can accommodate minimum 5 inch wide parapet wails. Metal coping cap color shall be as designated by the Owner's Representative. C. Carlisle Sure -Seal Termination Bar. a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum bar pre -punched 6 inches on center, incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and provide increased stability for membrane terminations. 2.07 WALKWAYS A. Protective surfacing for roof traffic shall be an additional layer of EPDM membrane, as applicable. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous materials shall be of the best grade available and approved in writing by roof system manufacturer for the specific application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform entire work of this Section in accordance with the best standards of practice relating to trades involved. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Adhere to local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. When conflict exists, the more restrictive document shall govem. C. Follow insurance underwriters requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems. D. Consider selected roof system manufacturer's current technical specifications a part of this Specification and use as a reference for specific application procedures and recommendations. 3.02 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A. Examineroof areas for conditions that would prevent proper application of new roofing. B. Verify that wood nailers are properly installed to receive roofing system. C. Examine roof deck and related surfaces, and verify that there are no conditions such as inadequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, ridges, or other conditions which would prevent the satisfactory installation of the roofing system. D. Correct or complete conditions requiring correction or completion prior to installation of roofing system. Notify Owner's Representative in writing of unacceptable conditions. R E. Verify focatTon of aff interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions. Perform ail work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above- mentioned items. F. Verify that separation membrane has been properly installed in the areas in accordance with requirements of membrane manufacturer for conformance with FM 1- 90 and warranty requirements. G. Start of work under this Section constitutes acceptance of substrate and site conditions. H. Verify: 1. Deck and substrates are clean, smooth, and free from depressions, waves, projections, defects, and damage. 2. Surfaces in contact with single -ply material are free from bitumen, grease, oil, or other foreign material. 3. Surfaces in contact with roofing membrane or separator sheet are free from sharp edges, fins, or projections. 4. All materials are completely dry and free from ice and snow, including substrate, deck, insulation, and roofing membrane as applicable. Confirm dryness by moisture meter and demonstrate to Owner's Representative. 5. Ali roof equipment, openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, and blocking members are solidly and properly set. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 6. Ail mechanical and electrical work to be covered has been installed, tested, and approved. 7. Work has been completed where possible for all other trades that require work or traffic on the roofing area. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION A. All roof insulation shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of Factory Mutual (FM), roof insulation manufacturer, and Roofing Membrane Manufacturer. B. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than % inch. Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided. C. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required mechanical fasteners or FAST Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Roofing Membrane: 1. Install root:.membrane in accordance with roofing manufacturer's most recently published specification and installation instructions. Cut sheets to maximum size possible in order to minimize seams. 2. Position membrane over substrate without stretching membrane. Allow membrane to relax for one-half hour before bonding, fastening, welding, and flashing. 3. Begin installation of roofing system at the lowest point of the project area and work to the highest point to prevent backwater laps. This will include completion of all flashings, terminations, and seals on a daily basis. 4. Execute work so membrane can be temporarily sealed on a down slope surface at the end of each day with nite-seal in accordance with the detail drawings. 5. Install fully adhered roofing system over the field of the roof with the length of the sheets parallel to the long dimension of the roof. 6. Position the roof membrane perimeter sheet along the perimeter of the roof over the acceptable substrate. Perimeter membrane width and securement shall be in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommended procedures for building height and location. Sheet placement shall permit edge, overlaps, and fastening as required by manufacturer. B. Membrane Splicing (Adhesive Splice): 1. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 3 inches wide) of both membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated with Splice Cleaner or HP -250 Primer. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 -11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Apply Splicing Cement and In -Seam Sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface. 3. Roll the splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller and wait at least 2 hours before applying Lap Sealant to the splice edge following the manufacturers requirements. 4. Field splices without Inseam Sealant must be overlaid with uncured flashing. C. Membrane Splicing (Tape Splice): 1. Overlap adjacent sheets and mark a line 1/2 inch out from the top sheet. 2. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 2-1/2 inches wide) of both membrane sheets with Sure -Seal Primer as required by the membrane manufacturer. 3. Apply Splice Tape to bottom sheet with the edge of the release paper along the marked line. Press tape onto the sheet using hand pressure. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch. 4. Remove the release paper and press the top sheet onto the tape using hand pressure. 't l 5. Roll the seam toward the splice edge with a 2 inch wide steel roller. 6. Install a 6 inch wide section of Pressure -Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform Flashing over all field splice intersections and seal edges of flashing with Lap Sealant. 7. The use of Lap Sealant with tape splices is optional except at tape overlaps and cut edges of reinforced membrane where Lap Sealant is required. D. Flashing: 1. Wall and curb flashing shall be cured EPDM membrane. Continue the deck membrane as wall flashing where practicable. 2. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. 3. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. 4. Flash penetrations with preformed flashing membrane as required to form a continuous membrane seal in each corner or change in plane, with cured or uncured sheet flashing. 5. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 -12 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 6. Install flashings for vents, pipe, soil vents, and other round projections in accordance with Roofing manufacturer's recommendations and the detail drawings. 7. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings E. Daily Seal: 1. Ensure that water does not flow beneath completed sections of membrane system. This will include completion of all flashings, terminations, and daily seals. When possible, install starting at the highest point of the project area, working to the lowest point. 2. Temporarily seal loose membrane edge with Roofing manufacturer's water cut-off sealant. Exercise caution to ensure that membrane is not temporarily sealed in such a manner as to promote water migration below the membrane or impede drainage. 3. Install daily night seals by extending the roof membrane beyond the insulation and sealing to existing roof surface. 4. When work is resumed, remove and dispose of membrane where asphalt or other sealants were previously applied before resuming installation. 1 : 3.05 WALKWAYS A. Install an additional layer of EPDM membrane at all traffic concentration points, such as at roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc., and all locations as identified on Drawings. 3.06 CLEANING A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner. B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre - inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking. END OF SECTION EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING Section 07531 -13 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 200§ SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1- GENERAL. 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Flashing and Sheet Metal as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Metal flashings and counter flashings, reglets, inserts. 2. Overflow scuppers. 3. Conductor Heads. 4. Gutters and downspouts. 5. Thru wall flashing, metal copings, gravel stops, bird stops. 6. Louvers and soffit vents. 7. Miscellaneous sheet metal items, and accessories. 8. Related sealant work. 9. All sheet metal at storefront. B. All sheet metal shall be provided from a single supplier. 102 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07721 - Roof Curbs. 2. Section 07920 - Sealants. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). zr a. ASTM A653 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. b. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 15 - Roof Assemblies and Roof Structures. b. Chapter 20 - Aluminum. 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA): 'Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", latest edition. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Section 07600 -1 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc. — Haze1 De11, WA1 Project No. 30651 September 13, 200511 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Installer Qualifications: Five years minirnum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of focal authorities having jurisdiction over this pail of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1. Prefinished materials masked with factory applied protective film shall be stored protected from the sun's ultraviolet rays until ready for installation. 1.05 MANUFACTUER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty against color fade, chalking and film integrity for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee, signed by the Contractor and Installer, against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the guarantee shall be for 2 years, and shall cover water infiltration behind and undemeath the sheet metal work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS r A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Sheet Metal: 1. Berridge Mfg. Co. httoJ/www.benfdge,com/ 2. "Colorkiad" by Integris Metals, Inc. httv:llwww.integrismetals.coml 3. "Una -Clad" by Copper Sales, inc. hte:llwww.uneclad.comf 4. "Pac-Clad" by Petersen Aluminum Corp. htlp://www.pao-olad_corn/ C. Soffit Vents: 1. CertainTeed Corp. htto:llwww.airvent.comf 2. Georgia Pacific Corp. http:I/www.go corn/ 3. Fry Reglet Corp. http:llwww.ttyrealet.coml 4. Johns Manville httQl/ ww. jm.comf 5. O'Hagin Inc. Vents http:llwww.ohaginvent.com/reauire.html 6. Owens Coming http:llwww.owenscorning.coml FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Section 07600 - 2 Deleted: KOHL', Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WA7 Project No. 300611 September 13, 2006'il KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2008 2.02 MATERIALS A. Soffd Vents: Extruded aluminum horizontal vent fabricated from 6063-T5 alloy, slotted, Style DCS -625-V-300, as manufactured by Fry Reglet or approved equivalent. 1. Size: 3" finished width in soffit x10'-0" continuous length. 2. Finish: Factory applied baked -on primer, field finished. 3. Provide square mesh, woven aluminum wire insect screen. B. Downspouts: 1. "Open face" profile. C. Sheet Metal: Galvanized carbon steel sheets, 24 gauge (except 22 gauge for overflow scuppers), Factory Finish. 1. Colors {Refer to Drawings): a. Prefinished, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Provide color matched fasteners where fasteners are exposed to view. 3. Provide color matched touch-up paint. 4. Field Finished Sheet Metal (As required as shown): Commercial quality with 0,20 percent copper per ASTM A653, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where Indicated for painting, 24 gauge except as otherwise indicated. Colors as shown on Drawings. D. Solder. ASTM B32, 50-50 tin and lead. E. Flux: Rosin type. F. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt emulsion, ASTM D1187, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extends possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Forrn exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckline and tool marks, true to line and levels Indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams In sheet metal with flat -lode seams. C. Expansion Provisions: 1. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently waterlweatherproof, form expansion joints of FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Section 07600- 3 Deleted: KOHL': Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WA% Protect No. 30851 September 13, 20081 (Deleted: 41>Fuily enclosed.% KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October] 2006 ,--. Deleted: KOHL'a Department intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic Store, Inc. - Hazel Dell, waq sealant (concealed within joints). Protect tro. 30661f September 13, 2006¶ 2. Provide for thermal expansion of running gutters and other exposed items. Maintain a water -tight seal at expansion joints. Locate expansion joints midway between drains, at high points in slopes, but no more than 30'-0" maximum spacing. 11 Joint Sealants: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be of same material or compatible with sheet metal being fastened. 1. Rivets, screws and bolts shall be hard copper, brass or bronze except screws for aluminum shall be aluminum or stainless steel with exposed heads anodized to match sheets. 2. Neoprene washers are required at ail exposed fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described In this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Anchor Work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendation of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. B. isolate from masonry, concrete and other dissimilar materials to prevent electrolysis, using bituminous paint or neoprene pads. C. Sheet Metal: Install sheet metal fascias and flashings with drip by screwing clips into wood nailer at 16" o.c. maximum. Screws shall be countersunk flat head type. Provide sheet metal in 12'-0" lengths with 1/4" expansion joints between lengths. Caulk using exterior building sealant, clear color, as specified in Sealants Section. D, Install gutters to provide for positive drainage. E. install metal cap flashing with hemmed edges and continuous cleats each side. Allow 1" expansion joint between cap flashing ends and provide joint cap as indicated on drawings. The use of exposed fasteners to secure cap flashing to substrate is unacceptable. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Section 07600 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Prosect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 F. Locate and place soffit vents plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. G. Install vents per manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A Performance: Water-tight/weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Remove protective plastic film immediately after installation of prefinished flashings and miscellaneous fabrications. B. Clean metal surfaces of substances, which could cause corrosion. C. Replace sections of prefinished flashing and trim, which exhibit abrasions on the face of surfaces exposed to view from finished grade. D. Field paint touch-up other marred and abraded surfaces. E. Remove ail flux, scraps, end dirt immediately Excess flux shall be neutralized with a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda and surface drenched with clean water. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Section 07600 - 5 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Den, WAq Protect No. 30651 September 13, 200611 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 07721 ROOF CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A Provide Roof Curbs for exhaust fans as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. 1. Manufactured structural insulated metal roof curbs. B. Definitions: 1. Structural Roof Curb: a. Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb, bearing on structural steel joists or headers, designed to support equipment dead load and roof dead and live loads. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: T 1. Seaton 05000 - Structural Steel: Roof opening frames and headers. 2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sheet metal flashing installed in conjunction with roof penetration curbs. 3. Division 15 - Exhaust fans and equipment 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). a. ASTM A463 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled, Aluminum Coated Type 1 and Type 2. b. ASTM A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. c. ASTM A792 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Fifty -Five Percent Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. American Welding Society (AWS). a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. ROOF CURBS Section 07721 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 15 - Roof Assemblies and Roof Structures. 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): a. SSPC-Paint 20 Type II - Zinc Rich Primers - Organic. B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify field welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that field welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Kohl's. C. Structural Curbs: Meet or exceed Live Loads and Dead Loads as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate curb dimensions with shop drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Manufacturer shall provide seismic calculations for structural curbs. D. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. E. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Ship curbs to site palletized and banded. C. Stack curbs at site to prevent twisting, bending or permanent deformation. D. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate with manufacturers and suppliers of roof mounted items and equipment. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturer: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product ROOF CURBS Section 07721 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 of a single manufacturer. 1. Thybar CorplThyCurb, (800) 666-2872 http:t/www.thybar.comlroofcurbs.html 2. Or equivalent, subject to compliance with Project requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural, factory insulated curbs, 14' high - roof equipment mounting: 1. Thybar Model TC -3 - Prefabricated Equipment Base, constructed to meet the required local codes. 2. Standard Construction: a. 14 gauge minimum galvanized steel. b. 2x2 or 2x4 wood nailer, angle reinforcement, duct channels and required insulated pans. c. All bases shall be designed to coordinate with the rooftop manufacturers equipment. d. Seismic construction and fastening as required by Authority having jurisdiction. C. Pipe Curbs:lfhybar Pipe Curbs, as required for pipe roof penetrations. D. Finish: Paint per Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation with roof membrane installation requirements. B. Roof Curbs Bearing on Steel Angles, Joists, and Headers: 1. Set units in place and secure base to roof structure by welding to top chord of structural member. 2. Secure metal deck to perimeter of curb as indicated on Drawings. C. Roof Curbs Bearing on Roof Deck: 1. Set units in place and secure base to steel roof deck by self -tapping screw fasteners spaced at a maximum of 12 inches on center, staggered. ROOF CURBS Section 07721 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Set curbs level, and adjust as required and as recommended by the curb manufacturer. 3.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate project requirements for custom adapting and connecting to roof curbs with manufacturers and suppliers of curb mounted items and equipment. END OF SECTION ROOF CURBS Section 07721 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079, October 12, 2006 SECTION 07920 SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A Provide Sealants as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Horizontal control joints in concrete floor slabs. 2. Joints in tilt -up panels. 3. Perimeter of doors, windows and other framed wall openings. 4. Bedding sealant for sills, thresholds, flanges and similar items requiring sealant. 5. General sealant applications where watertight or weathertight sealing is required. 8. Sealant between plastic laminate clad backsplashes and wall surface. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Sealant A weatherproof elastomer used in filling and sealing joints, having properties of adhesion, cohesion, extensibility to make joint air and watertight. Material is designed for application to joigts at exterior of structures and to other joints subject to movement. 1 B. Caulking Compound: A material used in filling joints and seams, having properties of adhesion and cohesion; shall not be required to have extensibility and recovery properties, usually applied to interior joint conditions. C. Caulking: The term is used here to denote the process of filling the joints, without regard to type of material. D. Joint Filler. A semi-rigid, full -depth joint filler capable of withstanding hard wheeled cart traffic without deflection b protect the edges of the concrete floor slab from spelling due to impact not required to be an elastic or adhesive material capable of sealing joints or maintaining bond in response to Joint movement or Tong -term concrete shrinkage. 1.03 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere Includes but it is not limited to: 1. Section 07270 - Firestopping: For firestopping sealants. 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard. SEALANTS Section 07920 -1 Deleted: KOHL'e Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WA1j Project No, 306511 September 13, 200611 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2.006 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 12 — interior Environment b. Chapter 19 — Concrete. c. Chapter 21— Masonry. d. Chapter 24 — Glass and Glazing. e. Chapter 26 — Plastic. C. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to the manufacturer. with a three years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. D. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. E. Joint Failure: Sealed joint or a portion thereof, exhibiting one or more of the following characteristics shall be deerned to have failed and shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Leaks air and/or water. 2. Sealant migrates. 3. Sealant loses cohesion. 4. Sealant does not cure. 5. Sealant discolors. 6. Sealant stains adjacent work. 7. Sealant develops bubbles, air pockets or voids. F. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Weather Conditions: 1. Install no liquid sealants under wet or freezing conditions or when temperatures are below or above those recommended by manufacturer. 2. Proceed with work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for joint cure and development of high early bond strength. 3. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, Install sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of temperature range recommended by sealant manufacturer. SPALANTS Section 07920 - 2 Deleted: KOHL'e Department Store, Inc. - Hazel Dell, WAQ Project No. 3069 September 13, 20061[ KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Prosect No. 3079 October 12. 2000 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. 8. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a minimum period of five (5) years for Urethanes and twenty (20) years for Silicones, or the Manufacturer's standard warranty, whichever is greater. The Warranty shall begin at the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fire (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS - GENERAL A Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Materials Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with Joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. C. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected from mar ufaijture's standard colors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sealants: 1. Sealant S 1: Multiple component, epoxidized polyurethane terpolymer, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement). Color shall match adjacent paint. a. "Dynatrol II" by Pecora Corp. b. "Sikafiex - 2c NS" by Sika Corp. c. "Sonolastic NP 2" by Sonnebom Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. d. "Dymenc' by Tremco, Inc. 2. Sealant S 2: One part, silicone, non -sag, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement). a. "999-A Silicone Building & Glazing Sealant" by Dow Coming Corp. b. "Construction 1200" by General Electric. c. "860" by Pecora Corp. SEALANTS Section 07920 - 3 Deleted: KOHL's Department Ston, Inc. - Hazel Dell, WAT Project No. 3055 September 13, 20061 KOHL'S Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. Sealant S 3: One part, silicone, mold and mildew resistant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 (25 percent movement). a. '766 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant" by Dow Corning Corp. b. "RTV408" by C.R. Laurence. c. "860" by Pecora Corp. 4. Sealant S 4: Multiple component, "self -leveling polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 (25 percent movement). a. "Urexpan NR -200" by Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolastic SL2" by Sonnebom Chem Rex, Inc. c. "THC -900" by Tremco, Inc. Where slopes exceed 1% (one percent), use manufacturer's recommended slope grade or non -sag formula. 5. Sealant S 5: One part, butyl ASTM C1311 (5 percent movement). a. 'BC -158" by Pecora Corp. b. "Butyl Sealant" by Tremco, Inc. 6. Caulking Compound C1: One part non -sag acrylic latex ASTM C834 (7-1/2 percent movement). a. "AC -20' by Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac by Sonnebom ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834" by Tremco, inc. 6. Joint Filler. 1. Closed -cell expanded polyethylene rod. a. "Ethafoam" by Dow Chemical Co. b. "Sonofoam Backer -Rod" by Sonnebom ChemRex, Inc. c. Or approved substitution. C. Joint Cleaner Primer and Sealer. Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing and caulking compound for the specific joint surface and conditions. D. Bond Breaker. Polyethylene tape of plastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant -contact surfaces where bond to substrate of joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. E. Masking Tape: Provide pressure -sensitive adhesive tape as selected by installer to protect surfaces from damage. F. Tooling agent: Alcohol, warm soapy water or other agent recommended by sealant manufacturer to insure firm, full contact of sealant with inner faces of joint. SEALANTS Section 07920 - 4 Deleted: KOHL'e Department Store, inc. - Hazel Dep, WAI/ Project No. mem September 13, 20061j KOHL's Department Store, Inc.—Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12 2006 G. Glazing Sealant 1. Application: Exterior and interior joints between glazing materials and framing not sealed with glazing gasket materials. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Coming, 791 Silicone Perimeter Sealant b. General Electric Co., 1200 Silicone Sealants. c. Pecora, #895 Silicone. 3. Color: Clear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealers and caulking for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not allow joint sealer work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: , r 1 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer, oil; grease waterproofing; water repellents; water, surface dirt and frost 2. Clean concrete, masonry and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic file and other non -porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. SEALANTS Section 07920 - 5 Deleted: KOHL', Depart hent Store, Inc. - Hazel Dell, WAI Protect No. 30651 September 13, 20061 KOHL's Department Store, inc.—TukwilaLWA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. E. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with joint sealer and caulking manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Compounds shall not be installed below a temperature of 40 degrees F unless the manufacturer specifically permits installation at a lower temperature. If job conditions require the installation of compounds below 40 degrees F (or below the minimum installation temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer's representative and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure the satisfactory work. B. Installation of Floor Joint Filler. 1. Install floor joint filler at all interior floor slab construction and control joints. Install floor joint filler full depth of joint. 2. Commence installation of floor joint flier under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. C. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C1193. D. Installation of Sealant Backings; install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements. 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants back of joints where required to prevent third -side adhesion of sealant to back of joint. SEALANTS Section 07920 - 6 Deleted: KOHL% Department Store, Inc. — Hazel. Dell, WA1 Project No. 30551 September 13, 20061 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Proiect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. G. Sealant shall be allowed to cure according to manufacturer's recommendations. After curing is complete, clean sealant with manufacturer approved deaner. If sealant is to be painted, it shall be painted after sealant is cleaned. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that curing is ensured per manufacturer's recommendations without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealers installations with required areas indistinguishable for original work. B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with deaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. r 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Sealant S 1: 1. Use polyurethane sealants at the perimeter of window frames, door frames, miscellaneous frames, conditions where sealant is in contact with the exterior insulation and finish system, for wall construction, control and expansion joints, and architectural precast copings. B. Sealant S 2: 1. Use silicone sealant for sheet metal work. C. Sealant S 3: 1. use silicone sealant, mold and mildew resistant type for use around plumbing fixtures only. D. Sealant S 4: 1. Use self -leveling polyurethane sealant for expansion joints in pedestrian traffic bearing surfaces. SEALANTS Section 07920 - 7 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc. - Hazel Dell, WAq Project No. 30651 September 13, 20061 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Sealant S 5: 1. Use butyl rubber sealant for bedding thresholds and sill plates. F. Interior Sealant: Use acrylic latex calking compound for interior applications only. Do NOT use this material: 1. Where joint movement is expected in excess of the materials specified capabilities. 2. Where a sealant is otherwise shown or specked above for use. END OF SECTION r SEALANTS Section 07920 - 8 Deleted: KOHL a Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WA1 Project No. 3oee4 September 13, 20061 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Metal Doors and Frames as shown on Drawings and as specified, compete. Include without limitation: 1. Flush, hollow standard steel doors. 2. Welded standard steel door frames, frames for sidelights, and other interior glazed openings, 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 08200 - Wood Doors. 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 3. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing. 4. Section 09900 - Painting. l _. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames by a current member of the Steel Door Institute (SDI). B. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). a. ANSI A 115 Series 82 on door and frame preparation. 2. American National Standards Institute/Steel Door Institute. a. ANSI/SDI 100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. ANSI/SDI A151.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. c. SDI 112, Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3. ASTM International (ASTM). a. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, including Positive Pressure Testing of Side -Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. 4. American Welding Society (AWS). METAL. DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 7. International Building Code (IBC): a, Chapter 7 — Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. c. Chapter 11— Accessibility. d. Chapter 22 — Steel. e. Chapter 24 — Glass and Glazing. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire -rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance ASTM E2074 by Underwriters Laboratory or another nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE .xr A. Deliver mairlals to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Do not receive doors before the building is enclosed. Remove wrappings or coverings upon arrival of doors at the Project site. Store the doors in a vertical position on blocking, clear off the floor and with blocking between the doors to permit air circulation between the doors. C. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. http://www.amweld.com/ 2. Curries Co. http://www.curries.com/ 3. Republic Builders Products. http://www.republicdoor.comf 4. Steelcraft Mfg. Co. http://www.steelcraft.com/ 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36. B. Steel Bars: ASTM A108. C. Steel Plate: ASTM A263. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, commercial quality, cold rolled, stretcher leveled. E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not Tess than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. 1. Expansion bolts are acceptable on Takeover Projects only. H. Primer: Rust inhibitive type, gray, red or beige as standard with the manufacturer. I. Door Silencers: Resilient, tamper-resistant plug, to reduce noise from interior doors closing against frames. Stick -on adhesive -backed silencers are NOT allowed. 1. No. 64 by Glynn -Johnson. 2. Provide 3 silencers for single doors and 4 for pairs of doors. 2.03 FABRICATION t A. General: - 1. Fabricate hollow metal doors and frames, and frames for wood doors as shown on Drawings, and in accordance with best shop practices. Make frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Take field measurements as required for coordination with adjoining work. 2. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with comers square, unless otherwise shown. Set each member in proper alignment and relationship to other members with surfaces straight and in a true plane. 3. Reinforce members and joints with steel plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength. 4. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Mortise and reinforce doors and frames for hardware in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's instructions and templates. Drill and tap reinforcing to receive hinges, locks, strikes, closers, and other hardware requiring reinforcing. 6. Grades: a. Grade 11 - Heavy Duty, Model 1: Full flush design for interior doors (Typical). b. Grade 111 - Extra Heavy Duty, Model 2: Seamless design for exterior doors (Typical). METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Frames: 1. Provide combination type hollow metal door frames to be used as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles. 2. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate interior frames of 16 gage steel and exterior frames of 14 gage galvanized steel. 3. Fully weld frames with corners mitered and ground smooth. 4. Reinforce frames for doors of high frequency use (Lounge, stairways, public toilet rooms, and similar areas) with two 10 gauge steel straps immediately above and below the top hinge in addition to standard reinforcement, conforming to the frame profile and welded to the frame. 5. Make provisions for door silencers on interior door frames: 3 for single frames and 4 for pairs of hinged doors. Install door silencers. install temporary plastic plugs in frames scheduled to be filled with mortar or plaster to keep holes clear during construction, and ship door silencers loose for field installation. 6. Frame Reinforcing: a. Cover Boxes: Provide for hardware cutouts. b. Hinge Reinforcements: 9 gauge, 1-1/2" x 9" long a c. Lock Strike Reinforcement: 16 gauge, 1-1/2" x 6" I d. Closer and Holder Reinforcements: 12 gauge, welded to frame. nd welded to frame. ong. 1-3/4" x 20" long shipped loose, and e. Angle Floor Clips: 16 gauge welded to frames or each drilled for two 318" anchors. 7. Furnish at least 3 metal anchors in each jamb of flames up to 84" high and one additional anchor for each 24" in height above 84", in shapes, sizes and spacing shown and required for anchorage into adjoining wall construction. Fabricate joint anchor of steel no lighter than gage used for the frame. 8. Except where frames are set in masonry, and in steel stud walls where studs extend to supporting construction above, equip frames with vertical steel struts, 3/8" x 2" minimum size, extending from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend top of struts at right angle for attachment to supporting construction above by bolting, welding or other suitable anchorage: Provide bolted attachment of strata to frame jambs to permit height adjustment during installation. 9. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. 10. Provide removable steel spreaders attached at the bottom of 3 -sided frames. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 11. Provide 18 gauge channel glazing stops for borrowed lites and sidelites. One stop shall be fixed and one stop shall be removable to facilitate glazing and re - glazing. 12. Mark frame number on the jamb of each frame in butt recess for identification at the job site. C. Doors: 1. Fabricate flush hollow metal doors with face sheets each formed of 18 gage steel for interior doors and 16 gage galvanized steel for exterior doors. Fabricate doors 1-3/4" thick unless otherwise noted. 2. Construct doors with small glazed and louvered openings unless otherwise noted. Reinforce the face sheets with 20 gage interlocking vertical C-shaped or Z-shaped reinforcing members spaced not over 6" apart and spot welded to both face sheets, or reinforce with a continuous truss formed under core of sheet metal, not lighter than 28 gage, spot welded to both face sheets, or 2- 3/4" horizontally and vertically over entire surface of both faces, or with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the door and laminated to both inside faces of the panels. Foam stiffened cores are NOT allowed. T 3. Provide continuous reinforcing members welded to face sheets at the top and bottom of door. For vertically reinforced doors, place cork, fiberboard, or mineral wool board, in the spaces between reinforcing members. Provide removable stops of 18 gage steel for glazed openings; fasten with oval head, counter -sunk screws at not more than 12" o.c. 4. Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous flush channel not Tess than 16 gage, extending all width of door and spot welded to both faces. Provide exterior doors with flush channel top or top cap as standard with the manufacturer. Make both vertical edges of doors flush and bevel 1/8" in 2". 5. Provide clearances for hollow metal doors of 3/32" at jambs and heads, 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 3/8" at bottom where no threshold is required. Where a threshold is shown, provide 1/8" clearance above threshold. 6. Exterior Doors: Insulate exterior non -fire rated hollow metal doors with polyurethane foamed in place, R -value = 10. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so delamination will not occur during operating conditions. D. Fire Rated Doors and Frames: 1. Comply with the label requirements of the 111, NFPA, and applicable local codes, in addition to other requirements for hollow metal doors and frames specified herein. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No, 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 80 and UL Standard for Safety No. 63 for the class of door opening scheduled. a. Doors and frames shall bear the appropriate UL labels. b. Label shall state required fire -protection rating and maximum temperature rise rating. 1) Maximum temperature rise rating is required for doors protecting exit enclosures. Doors only shall bear this label. 3. Where pairs of doors are scheduled, provide door manufacturer's standard Astragal and Coordinator, identical in performance to those used in the approved test assembly for the fire rating indicated or required. 4. Louvers in fire rated doors (As applicable): Refer to Par. 2.03.E.2. of this Section. E. Door Louvers: 1. Provide sight -proof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 -gage cold- rolled steer§et into 20 -gage steel frame. a. Maximum opening area including light openings, shall not exceed one- half door height or 40 percent of leaf area, installed 5" minimum from door edge. 2. Louvers in Fire -Rated Doors (As applicable): Provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at every joint F. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI M15 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING A. Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by solvent cleaning. B. Apply one coat of specified primer. Cover surfaces without runs, smears and bare spots. C. Paint inside surface of removable stops and the frame area covered by such stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, flames, and accessories in accordance with final Shop Drawings and manufacturer's data, and as specified herein. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provision of 501-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" or as otherwise required by manufacturer's recommendations. Except for frames located at in-place concrete and masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. At masonry and concrete construction coat entire inside surface of frames with asphaltic paint to reduce corrosion. 2. At Concrete Tilt Up Panel Construction, hollow metal frames must be set and secured in place prior to pouring of panel. 3. In Masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 4. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and grout solid to adjacent construction. 5. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 6. In metal stud partition, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. in closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. C. Door Installation: 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI -100 and as specified herein 2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. B. Remove dirt and excess sealants from exposed surfaces. C. Touch up welds, scratches and abraded spots with same paint as used for the prime coat. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08100 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Wood Doors as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Flush wood doors. 2. Pre -machining of wood doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 06100 - Carpentry: For installation of wood doors. 2. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: For frames for wood doors. 3. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 4. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09900 - Painting. r 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Section 1300. 2. Window and Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA) I.S.1-A. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. International Building Code (IBC): a, Chapter 7 — Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. c. Chapter 11— Accessibility. d. Chapter 24 -- Glass and Glazing. B. Fire Doors shall conform to UL Standard 10(b) for label indicated on Drawings or specified herein; face veneer shall conform to Section 3.11. Fabrication of doors shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Pamphlet No. 80. 1. Fire rated doors shall bear UL labels. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Doors shall not be delivered to the Project site until building has been closed -in and is thoroughly dry. WOOD DOORS Section 08200 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact Inspect materials upon delivery. C. Doors shall be stacked flat on pallets, separated from each other by non-absorbent spacers, and protective wrapped by the manufacturer. Doors shall not be removed from manufacturer's protective packaging until painting and other interior finishing work has been completed. D. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for life of original installation. Warp in excess of that permitted by WDMA Industry Standard, and other defects which may affect the operation of the door, shall be considered a defect under the provisions of the warranty. The door manufacturer or door manufacturer's authorized representative shall be responsible for inspecting the installation of the doors before issuance of the warranty, and shall note on the warranty that the doors have been hung in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 8. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 3 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Acceptable Manufacturers, Solid Core Doors: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. htto:lfwww.algomahardwoods.com! 2.02 MATERIALS A. Door Types: 1. Flush, 5 -ply, solid wood core, hardwood veneered, Premium Grade, AWI Quality Standards, Section 1300 (7 -ply doors are NOT acceptable). a. Cores: 1) Particleboard core, Symbol PC -5. 2) Glued block solid wood core, Symbol SLC -5. b. Face Veneer: 1) A Grade, Red Oak, plain sliced; vertical grain run, unless shown otherwise. 2) Natural Birch, rotary cut; for opaque paint finish. WOOD DOORS Section 08200 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 c. Crossbands: Hardwood or engineered hardwood, 1/16" thick, extending full width of door. d. Edge Bands: Same species as face veneer, matched for color. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral Core, Symbol FD1. a. Label Requirements: B Label, 60 minutes. B. Door Louvers: Refer to Section 08100, C. Pre -Machining: Doors shall be pre -machined for mortise -applied hardware. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, and hardware templates. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre -machining. 1. Door Hardware: Refer to Drawings for locations required. D. Glazed Lites: Tempered frosted glass by door manufacturer. 1. Refer to drawings for locations, dimensions and additional information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 40- 3.01 PREPARATION ' A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors in accordance with approved shop drawings and applicable codes and standards. B. Refer to Drawings and Section 06100 of these Specifications for installation details. C. Refer to Section 09900 for sealing doors upon arrival at the Project site and for field finishing, 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At completion of work, touch-up minor damage to prefinished surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. Replace materials damaged or stained during installation. END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS Section 08200 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08300 SPECIAL DOORS (OVERHEAD AND IMPACT) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Special Doors as shown on Drawings and as without limitation: specified, complete. Include 1. Sectional Metal Overhead Doors, insulated. 2. Impact Doors, double acting. 3. Hardware and accessories required for a complete job. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 05700 - 2. Section 06100 - 3. Section 08100 - 4. Section 08710 - 5. Section 09900 - ,. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Miscellaneous Metals. Carpentry. Metal Doors and Frames. Finish Hardware. Painting. A Comply with codes, laws, ordinances jurisdiction over this part of the work. B. International Building Code (IBC): 1. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. 2. Chapter 22 — Steel. and regulations of local authorities having C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's Installer, or Manufacturer approved Installer, with a five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Overhead Door Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of ten (10) years against cracking, splitting or deterioration due to rust, and seven (7) year Warranty against separation of insulation from the steel skin of the door section. SPECIAL DOORS (OVERHEAD AND IMPACT) Section 08300 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, for all doors specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturer AH materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.02 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOOR A. Door: 1. "Thermospan 150" manually operated, flush, insulated, sectional steel overhead door, by Wayne Dalton Corp. Mt, Hope, OH (800) 827-3667. http://www.wayne-dalton.com)TS 150.aso. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. B. Door Description: 1. Sections: Hot -dipped galvanized steel skins, 0.022" thick exterior, 0.014" thick interior, with tightly packed polyurethane core, 1-318" thick overall. a. Fifli§h: 1) Exterior finish: Factory primed and pre -painted; to be field painted, when shown on Exterior Elevations. Color as shown on Drawings. 2) Interior finish: Factory primed, pre -painted, white, 2. End Stiles: 18 -gauge, hot -dipped galvanized steel. 3. Counterbalance: Oil tempered helical torsion springs, with grooved cable drums mounted on steel shafts extending full width of opening. Galvanized steel lift cables attached securely to comer lift brackets. a. Provide 50,000 cycle springs or manufacturer's standard, whichever is greater. 4. Standard Lift Track (Verify Ceiling Height): Hot -dipped galvanized, 2", 16 gauge steel track, securely fastened to jambs by continuous angles, inclined to ensure weather -tight closure. 5. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide comer lift brackets engineered to size and weight of door. Hardware provided shall satisfy required headroom, side room and backroom conditions, and shall be engineered to size and weight of specified door. Miscellaneous hardware components, except castings, springs, spring shaft and cable drum shall be zinc or cadmium plated. Provide engineered reinforcing in accordance with standard engineering practices. SPECIAL DOORS (OVERHEAD AND IMPACT) Section 08300 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 6. Hardware: a. General: Provide heavy-duty, rust -resistant hardware, with galvanized, cadmium -plated or stainless steel fasteners, to suit type of door. b. Hinges: Provide heavy-duty hot -dipped galvanized steel hinges at each end stile and at center of each section, per manufacturer's printed recommendations for size of door. Attach hinges to door sections with Tek screws per manufacturer's recommendations. Hinges and roller brackets shall be hot -dipped galvanized steel, formed to provide mounting for rollers at edges of doors and engineered to provide tight contact between sections. Rollers shall have hardened steel ball bearings, with case-hardened inner race, and be mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide roller tires to suit size of track. 1) Case-hardened steel tires, for normal installations. c. Locking Bar: Single side, operable from inside only, which engages right-hand vertical track, and is punched to receive padlock. 1) Refer to Section 08710 for padlock. d. Lifting Handles: Galvanized steel. ~r: 7. Weatherstripping: a. Between Sections: Factory installed rubber joint seals fitted into tongue and groove joint between each section. b. Door Bottom: PVC retainer with "bulb" type astragal. c. Other Provide gasketed perimeter seals at jambs and head. C. Operation: 1. Provide lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, operating with not more than 25 lbs. lift or pull. 2.03 IMPACT DOORS A. Double-acting, aluminum clad, self-closing impact doors: 1. "Easy Swing" Model SCP -7, by Eliason Corp. Ditto://www.eliasoncorgicom/ 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. B. Door Description: 1. Door shall be double acting, self-closing, medium use type, constructed of 3/4" solid core exterior grade plywood, and metal clad. Top panels 0.032" 6061-T6 aluminum alloy, satin anodized finish. Base plates 48" high, 18 gauge stainless steel both sides. SPECIAL DOORS (OVERHEAD AND IMPACT) Section 08300 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2 Hardware: a. Manufacturer's zinc coated steel hinges providing swinging operation in both directions and 5" x 18" high jamb guards. b. Door Stops: Wall stops as specified in Section 08710. Provide door stops on both sides of doors. 3. Vision Panels: Each leaf shall be provided with 3/16" thick, 9" x 14" vision panel of scratch resistant polycarbonate, set in black rubber molding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect doors and hardware complete. 1 B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion, lubricate all moving parts and test operation of doors in the presence of the Owner's representative; make adjustments as required. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION SPECIAL DOORS (OVERHEAD AND IMPACT) Section 08300 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08400 ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Receive, store, prepare, fabricate as required, and install Owner furnished items as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Refer to Par. 2.03 of this Section for additional information. 1. For the purpose of this Contract, wherever the word °Owner" appears in this Section, it shall mean Kohl's Department Stores, Inc. or their Representatives. 2. Kohl's Material Supplier shall be Klein-Dickert Milwaukee, Inc. B. Finish Hardware: 1. Door hardware for manually operated aluminum doors, including construction cylinders, shall be furnished by Material Supplier. 2. Owner will furnish final master cylinder cores. yf C. Furnish and -install materials as required for a complete Storefront installation. 1. Include building exterior aluminum accent bands, interior partition walls and vestibules if applicable. 2. Refer to Par. 2.03 for Owner supplied materials, and Par. 2.04 for installing Contractors furnished materials for this Section. D. Contractor shall be responsible for a complete Storefront construction as shown on Drawings, as required, and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 08460 - Door Operators - Automatic. 2. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing: Glass and glazing materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA). 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Requirements for entrance door access, entrance doors and hardware. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM E283 - Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. Infiltration shall not exceed .06 CFM per square foot of fixed area at 6.24 PSF. b. ASTM E331 - Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. No water penetration at a test pressure of 10 PSF. 5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 6. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 10 - Means of Egress. b. Chapter 11 - Accessibifity. c. Chapter 20 - Aluminum. d. Chapter 24 - Glass and Glazing. B. Structural Performance: Exterior Doors and Storefronts shall meet the following deflection and windload criteria. 1. Maximum "deflection of L/175 of span under a windload pressure calculation based on the design windloads per local codes, but not less than 20 psf. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. D. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.04 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall review all bid documents. All discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to bid time. All discrepancies not noted before bid shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Contractor shall include in his bid all field labor, fabrication labor, storage, and transport necessary to completely install the storefront as indicated on the drawings, and perform all warranty work required during the warranty period. C. Contractor shall coordinate methods and sequences of construction and separation of responsibilities between subcontractors. D. Contractor shall coordinate delivery of storefront materials to Contractor's business facility with Klein-Dickert Milwaukee, Inc. E. Contractor shall receive Owner supplied materials and verify contents. Once received, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials furnished by Owner in this Section. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, above ground and protected from weather, construction activities and other causes of damage. B. Replace damaged materials as required, at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Storefront Manufacturer: Kawneer Co., Inc. 1. Storefront Material Supplier - National Account: Klein-Dickert Milwaukee, Inc., See Vendor Contact List on Sheet DS1 for contact information. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2.02 STOREFRONT SYSTEM A. Exterior, return partition walls and Vestibule (Vestibule where applicable). Curtainwall and Storefront Systems as manufactured by Kawneer. 1. Framing: 1600 Innovation Curtainwall, a nominal 2 1/2 x 7 1/2 system, Trifab 451 CG framing; *a nominal 2 %' x 4 W system and Trifab 450CG at retum partition wall. a. Trifab 450CG framing, a nominal 2 1/" x 4 1/2' system at Vestibules where applicable. 2. Doors: 350 - Medium Stile. B. Other materials include but are not limited to: 1. Fasteners. 2. Noncorrosive concealed flashing. 3 Brackets and reinforcements. 4. Concrete/masonry inserts. 5. Compression weatherstripping. 6. Exposed aluminum flashings. 7. Sill plates. 8. Door hardware. 2.03 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER (Kohl's Department Stores) A. Storefront supplier will provide Shop Drawings for Contractor's use upon award of contract. B. Storefront components and materials fumished by Kohl's Storefront supplier for Contractors fabrication, preparation and installation: 1. Complete Storefront entrance doors with factory applied panic hardware, continuous hinges, fabricated (knocked down) door frames with threshold and door pull handle prep. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 a. Storefront will be prefinished Bone White". 2. Kawneer stock length 1600 Innovation Curtainwall, Trifab 451CG, Trifab 450CG and accent band stock length aluminum and framing, for Contractors fabrication. 3. Kawneer 1600 Innovation Curtainwall, Trifab 451CG, Trifab 450CG and accent band accessories, shipped loose for glazing Contractor's fabrication and installation: a. Shear block and shear block screws. Pressure plate screws. b. Screw spline screws. c. Setting blocks for 1" glazing and 1/4" glazing if applicable. d. Standard glazing gaskets and structural glazing gaskets. e. Wind -load steel if applicable. f. Water deflectors and zone dams/joint plugs. g. Perimeter anchors for anchoring curtainwall and storefronts to structure. h. Accent band splice sleeves and attachment anchors. Formed and painted .080 aluminum inside storefront corner column covers with receiver. 4. Kawneer 350 doors with factory applied panics, continuous hinges, and door frame inserts with thresholds. a. Doors will be shipped with factory applied concealed vertical rod panic devices, Best cylinders with construction cores, continuous hinges and pull handle prep. b. Door insert frames with thresholds will be factory fabricated and shipped knocked down for Contractors assembly. 5. Entry door Hardware, shipped loose for Contractor's preparation and/or installation, fumished by Storefront Supplier: a. LCN 4041 door closers with drop plates. b. Pull hardware c. Door sweeps for exterior doors only 6. Prefinished aluminum honeycomb panels to match Storefront color, 1" insulated and cut to size. a. Refer to Kohl's Entry Prototype Drawings, Page 1 of 6 for additional information. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 7. Kawneer 1010 mall doors (As applicable for store type): a. Doors will be fabricated and shipped knocked down for assembly and glazing by Contractor. 8. Storefront supplier will ship the following material freight prepaid to the installing Contractor's business location: a. Kawneer stock length 1600 innovation curtainwall framing, Trifab 450CG 1 451CG storefront framing, accent bands, entrance doors, brake aluminum, perimeter anchors, fabrication and glazing accessories (Supplied by Kawneer). b. 1" honeycomb aluminum panels (Supplied by Una -Clad). c. LCN 4041 closer with 18G drop plates, pull handles, door sweeps, shop drawings, installation instructions and miscellaneous anchors (Supplied by Klein-Dickert). d. Butt glazed 5/8" tempered glass walls (Supplied by Oldcastle Glass). 2.04 MATERIALS TO BE PROVIDED BY INSTALLING CONTRACTOR sr A. Contractor shall provide the following, including without limitation: 1. Glass and Glazing for all aluminum curtainwalls, storefronts, entry doors, and mall doors (as applicable for store type). a. Refer to Section 08800 for glass type description, Storefront Glass Schedule and additional information. 2. Miscellaneous shims for attachment of storefront curtainwall, accent bands and return wall partitions. 3. Perimeter caulking and joint sealants required for frame fabrication and installation. Refer to Klein-Dickert shop drawings and Section 07920 for additional information. 4. Bituminous coatings, as required. a. Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - PS 12, compounded for 30 -mil thickness per coat. B. Contractor shall prepare and fabricate all curtainwall storefront stock length material including without limitation, immediate door frames and entry door hardware preps (with the exception of items prepped by the factory), as required for a complete installation. C. Contractor shall provide Storefront construction, assembly and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install storefront in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and Shop Drawings, plumb level and true to line. B. Aluminum in contact with masonry, steel, concrete or dissimilar material shall be protected from contact by neoprene gaskets or bituminous coating. C. Before anchoring storefront to structure, shim and brace work, plumb and level in designated location. D. Install doors in frames for uniform contact. Doors shall have full swing throughout without binding or sticking. E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items, complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever f)ossible. F. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provide weathertight construction. 1. Refer to Section 07920 and shop drawings for sealants, to be installed during installation of doors and frames. G. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and Section 08800 for glass and glazing work. H. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades in installing low voltage wiring and reed switches in door frame heads for security requirements and per requirements of Division 16 - Electrical. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for a proper operation as required. B. Clean all aluminum and glazing at completion of the work. C. Protect exposed surfaces of installed aluminum against damage by staining, abrasion or other injury, and final clean aluminum and glazing at the completion of the project, before on-site review. END OF SECTION ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08400 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08460 DOOR OPERATORS - AUTOMATIC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide automatic Door Operators as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Accessories as required for a complete job. B. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 08400 - Entrances and Storefronts. 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 3. Division 16 - Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. tT 1. ADA regulations. 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. b. Chapter 11 —Accessibility. c. Chapter 27 -- Electrical. B. Provide hardware system complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.10 or ANSI/BHMA A156.19. The system must operate between -30 degrees F. and 130 degrees F. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Deliver materials to the project in manufacturer's unopened packages, fully identified as to name, type and other identifying data. Packaging shall bear the UL labels, where applicable. B. Store and handle materials to protect from damage, per manufacturer's printed instructions. DOOR OPERATORS - AUTOMATIC Section 08460 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. National Account Automatic Entrances of Wisconsin. See Vendor Contact list on Buzzsaw web site for contact information. B. Operator (NO SUBSTITUTIONS): 1. The Stanley Works, Access Technologies. a. Supplied by Automatic Entrances of Wisconsin in National Account Pricing. C. Controls and Radio Receiver. 1. Curran Engineering Co., Inc. http:// ww.curranengineering.com a. Supplied by Automatic Entrances of Wisconsin in National Account Pricing. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Door Operating Egaikment: 1. Electro -mechanical system installed in a visible header, Stanley "Magic -Access" door operator, visible application, for single in or outswinging door. a. Factory Finished Aluminum: Match aluminum entrances and storefront B. Public Door Controls: 1. Storefront Jamb Mounted Control: a. Model CE -615 -SF stainless steel push plate control; face plate with blue lettering; engraved with International Symbol of Accessibility, and "PUSH TO OPEN". 2. Guardpost Mounted Control: a. Model CE -911 -615 -SRC stainless steel guardpost and surface mounted control box, with similar controls and text specified for jamb mounted device, and providing radio controlled signal to door operator. C. Radio Receiver Model CE -675-2. D. Provide wiring from door operating equipment to hard -wired public door controls. E. Provide 115V, 60 Hz, 1 -phase, 15 amp supply to the door header and conduit for wiring between hard -wired public door controls and operating equipment 2.03 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS DOOR OPERATORS - AUTOMATIC Section 08460 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. The equipment shall be designed to handle aluminum entrance doors specified of the size shown on the Drawings. B. At each customer entrance, one set of doors will be controlled by an automatic door operator. Specific location of automatic door operator shall be determined as the farthest away from the cash wrap counters. C. Opening Speed: 1. The door shall be field adjustable so that opening speed to back check or 80 degrees shall be 3 seconds or longer as required in Table I of ANSIIBHMA A156.19. 2. Opening speed to fully open shall be 4 seconds or longer. D. Hold -Open: 1. The door shall be field adjustable to remain- fully open for not less than 5 seconds and up to 30 seconds. E. Closing Speed: 1. Doors shall be field adjustable to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 seconds or4onger as required in Table I of ANSIIBHMA A156.19. 2. Doors shall be field adjustable to close from 10 degrees to fully closed in not less than 1.5 second. F. The force required to prevent a door from opening or closing shall not exceed 15 lbs./foot applied 1 inch from latch edge of the door at every point in the opening or closing cycle. G. In the event of a power failure, doors shall open with a manual pressure not to exceed 25 Ibs.lfoot at a point 1 inch from the latch edge of the door. 2.04 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Push Plate Operation: 1. Push plate on either side of door shall activate the door and open slowly to back check (80 degrees) in 3 to 6 seconds, and to fully open position in 4to 7 seconds They shall remain open with an adjustable setting between 5 to 30 seconds. 2. After time delay, door shall close by a spring in the door operator from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 to 6 seconds, and from 10 degrees to fully closed in 1-1/2 to 2 seconds. B. Manual Operation: 1. When power assist is on or off, door system shall operate equivalent to a #3 manual door closer from exterior doors. C. Hold Open: DOOR OPERATORS - AUTOMATIC Section 08460 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Door shall have a hold open option to automatically open door to full open position and remain open. D. Provide push plates in locations shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the surrounding structure and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install Door Operators and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Each door shall be cycled 100 times then readjusted for optimum operating condition and safety. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1 A Adjust all doors and hardware as required for proper operation, and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Automatic doors shall not be used as a means of access for construction materials and equipment without approval by the Owner's representative. 1. Damage resulting from such use shall be immediately repaired or doors and hardware replaced as approved by Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION DOOR OPERATORS - AUTOMATIC Section 08460 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2005 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A This Section includes fumishing and installation of hardware, thresholds and weather- stripping for interior and exterior doors. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Related work specified elsewhere includes but may not be limited to: 1. Section 08100 2. Section 08300 3. Section 08400 4. Section 08460 5. Section 10160 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Doors and Frames. - Special Doors (Overhead and Impact). - Entrances and Storefronts: Storefronts and related Hardware. - Door Operators - Automatic. - Metal Toilet Partitions: For toilet partition hardware. A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following published codes, specificationsiand standards except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings and specified herein: 1. Handicapped Access: a. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Access regulations stipulated by authority having jurisdiction. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): b. A 115.1 - Specification for Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. c. A 115.2 - Specification for Standard Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Standards for Materials and Finishes: BHMA 1301, latest edition. 4. International Building Code (IBC): a. b. c. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. Chapter 11— Accessibility. Chapter 27 -- Electrical. 5. National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA): d. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. e. NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Building Materials Directory. B. Manufacturer: To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer even though several are indicated as acceptable manufacturers. C. Hardware supplier shall be an authorized distributor of manufacturers listed. Hardware work shall be done under the direct supervision of a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. 1. Hardware supplier shall be responsible for thoroughly detailing the Project to assure that the items specified will properly function in the indicated locations. 2. Hardware supplier shall be approved by Owner. D. Provide UL and Warnock -Hersey listed hardware for UL labeled openings in conformance with requirements for the class of opening scheduled. E. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware to the job site in the manufacturer's original packages with manufacturer's instructions for installation and operation enclosed. Mark each item clearly with the applicable hardware heading and opening number. 40- B. Handle materials to prevent damage to surfaces, edges and ends. Replace damaged materials. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit one sample copy of manufacturers warranty for specified materials. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturer is the designated manufacturer for each hardware item. The product numbers of these manufacturers are listed in the hardware headings in this Section, along with an abbreviation of the name of the manufacturer. B. Equivalent Manufacturers: Designated manufacturers whose products may be acceptable for the Work if, in the opinion of the Architect, the products meet the intent of the Specifications in terms of design, function, material, and quality of workmanship. Alternate manufacturers are not acceptable for certain products as specified herein. FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PRODUCTS SPECIFIED 6CCEPTABLE Butts/Hinges Hager McKinney, PBB, Stanley Exit Alarms Alarm Lock No Substitution Von Duprin Locksets Best No Substitution Electronic Locksets Alarm Lock No Substitution Pulls and Push Plates/Bars Trimco Hager, Hiawatha Closers LCN No Substitution Protective Plates Trimco Hager, Hiawatha Stops and Holders: Overhead Stops Ives Hager, Trimco Hold Opens RIxson-Firemark No Substitution Thresholds, Jamb Gaskets & Reese National Guard, Pemko Weatherstrips Von Duprin (Fire rated Exit Devices Dor-O-Matic doors only) Observation Device & Ives Surface Bolt Latch Protection Hager No Substitution C. This Specificction may also list aluminum door hardware, which is part of the aluminum storefront manufacturer's hardware, including pivots, pulls and thresholds. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Butt Hinges: 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Hager McKinney ABB Stanley 1279 T2714 PB81 F179 BB1279 TB2714 BB81 FBB179 BB1191 TB2314 BB51 FBB191 B131168 T4B3786 4B81 FBB168 BBI199 T4B3386 4B51 FBB199 2. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows: f. Quantity. 1) Two hinges per leaf for openings through 60" high; except as otherwise specified herein. 2) One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30" in height, or fraction thereof. 3) Three hinges for the compactor door, 9. Weight and Type. 1) Standard weight, plain bearing hinge 1279 for interior openings through 36" wide without a door closer. FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2) Standard weight, ball bearing hinge BB 1279 for interior openings over 36" through 40" wide, and interior openings through 40" wide with a door closer. 3) Standard weight, bail bearing hinge BB 1191 x NRP for exterior outswinging nonpublic entrance openings through 40" wide. 4) Heavyweight, four ball bearing hinge BBI168 for interior openings over 40" wide, and public vestibule openings at exterior doors. 5) Heavyweight four ball bearing hinge BB 1199 x NRP for exterior outswinging public entrance openings and exterior outswinging non- public exterior openings over 40" wide. h. Sizes. 1) 3" x 3" for 1-1/8" thick doors. 2) 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" for 1-3/4" thick doors. 3) 5" x 5" for 2-1/4" thick doors. B. Exit Alarms. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Alarm Lock Von Duprin Model 260 Model 2670 Model 710 2. Fumish exit'garm series and functions specified in the hardware schedule. 3. Where Lock Type D is indicated in the Key and Lock Legend shown on the Drawings, provide exit alarm manufacturer's Model 44 Double Door Holder and Model 732M Double Door Keeper. C. Where required by code, provide Fire Rated Exit/Panic device: Von Duprin 99-F series with ALK Alarm Kit. D. Locksets. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Best 9K Series H Series 2. Furnish lock types and functions specified in the hardware schedule, with the following provisions: a. Cylinders: 7 pin. b. Backsets: 2 3/4". c. Strikes: 1) ANSI A 115.2 type for hollow metal doors and frames. 2) Lip length sufficient to protect trim, frame and inactive leaf. 3. Furnish lever handles on passage doors. FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Electronic Locksets. 1. Acceptable manufacturer: Alarm Lock, Trilogy T2 DL -2700K. F. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Trimco Hasler Hiawatha 1013-38 33G -4x16-8" ctc 200Fx523A 1001-3 30S-8 x 16 200K 1001-11 30S-4 x 16 200F P8N 2. Where pulls, push plates, push bars or push -pulls are listed in the hardware schedule furnish: a. Pull 161 8": Interior and exterior doors, EXCEPT roof access and compactor doors. b. Push plates 40 8 x 16: Flush interior doors. c. Push plates 40 4 x 16: Flush exterior doors. d. Pull P8N: Roof access and compactor doors. G. Closers. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: LCN 1460 4110 2. Where closers are listed in the hardware schedule, furnish 1460 series unless other functions/series are specified in the hardware groups. 3. Fumish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates and special shoes as may be required by the door and frame conditions. 4. Furnish Integral cushion stop where indicated CUSH in the Hardware Groups. 5. Furnish through bolt attachments for closers specified for mineral core doors. 6. Determine closer size in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for application on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stair doors, and interior side of exterior doors. H. Protective Plates. 1. Where protective plates are specified in the hardware schedule, furnish 16 gauge, 0.050" plates with the following dimensions: a. Width: 2" Tess than door width, b. Height: 10". FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 Wall Stops/Floor Stops. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives Hager Trimco WS407CCV 236W 1270WV W5443 255W 1205 FS436 241F 1211 FS18L. 269T 1209HA 2. Furnish a WS407CCV Series wall stop, as applicable, for each door leaf except where wall stops WS443 are specified in the hardware schedule, 3. Fumish an FS436 floor stop where doors do not swing against a wall and overhead stops or closers with integral cushion stops are not specified. 4. Furnish FS18L floor stops at impact doors. J. Hold Opens. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Rixson-Firemark FM9;8 2. Furnish an FM -998 magnetic hold open for each leaf of pairs of doors where a hold open is specified in the hardware schedule. K. Thresholds, Weatherstrips, Raindrips, and Jamb Gaskets. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Reese National GuardPemko S205A 425 Alum 171A DS78C 13ONS 315 -CR 323C 200N 315 -CN R201 C 16AD 346C F -797B 5050 S88D S411A 952 R.5FA 2. Furnish F -797B head and jamb gaskets for all labeled doors in "One -Hour' corridors. 3. Raindrips: F -353A as manufactured by Reese, or equivalent by National Guard or Pemko. L. Observation Device and Surface Bolt. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives 698 SB -453 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 M. Latch Protection 1. Acceptable manufacturer and catalog number Hager 341 D 2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Furnish hardware with screws, thru-bolts and other fastenings suitable to assure permanent anchorage. Where exposed, fastenings shall be countersunk oval -head type, (except use fiat -head for hinges), and shall match finish of hardware being attached. B. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Hardware shall not be attached with self - tapping screws and sheet metal screws. Door closers, closer arms, door holders, holder arms and door stops shall be secured to doors with plated head sex bolts with smooth head to exterior Floor type stops and holders shall be fastened to the floor with machine screws into expansion shields. 1. Items for application to metal shall be furnished with machine screws. Items for application to concrete and masonry shall be fumished with machine screws and expansion shields. Items for application to wood shall be fumished with wood screws. Screws for items applied on gypsum board and plaster shall be sufficiently long to providd solid connection to framing/backing behind the plaster and gypsum board' -• 2. Exposed fastenings shall be finished to match the items fastened. Fastenings shall be the same metal as the item fastened except that fastenings for aluminum items shall be brass or stainless steel. 3. Hardware and fastenings for application to fire doors shall be Underwriter's Laboratories or Wamock-Hersey approved and listed, as applicable. 2.04 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS A. Furnish hardware with finishes as designated by the BHMA 600 Series symbols used in this Section. B. Except where indicated otherwise in the hardware groups or herein, all hardware finishes shall be applied over base metals as shown below: HARDWARE ITEM FINISH AND BASE METAL Butt Hinges Exterior US32D on stainless steel Interior US26D on steel Exit Controls US26D on brass or bronze Locksets US26D on brass or bronze or US32D on stainless steel Pulls & Push Plates/Bars US32D on stainless steel Closers (Typical) Sprayed AL on cast iron or aluminum Closers (Alum. Entrances) Sprayed AL on cast iron or aluminum Protective Plates US32D on stainless steel Wall Stops and Holders US26D on brass or bronze Thresholds Mill aluminum FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 Weatherstrips, Sweep Strips Clear anodized aluminum Latch Protection US32D on stainless steel Miscellaneous US26D on brass or bronze 2.05 KEYING A. All keying requirements will be accomplished by Best Lock Corporation directly with the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation, inspect the following: 1. Door frames to verify all of the following are within acceptable tolerances. a. Frame installed plumb. b. Opening size correct. c. Frame prepared and reinforced properly to accept specified hardware. 2. Inspect doors to verify all of the following are within acceptable tolerances. a. Door square and true. b. Doo?`size correct. c. ' Door prepared and reinforced properly to accept specified hardware. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto and into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re -install each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level plumb and tree to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, to maintain the label. E. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work. F. install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways, and interior side of exterior doors. G Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered comers and hair- line airline joints. ,coin units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, as applicable. H. Drill and countersink units, which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 1. Mounting Heights: FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to the recommended mounting locations of the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association, and as required to comply with the ADA standards. 2. Install wall stops to strike near top of doors, but not more than 78" from the finished floor line; install wall stops to engage knobs, levers and pulls. 3. Install magnetic hold opens at 78" from finished floor line and 8" to 10" in from edge of door opposite hinge side, unless otherwise required for proper operation and door release. J. Deliver to the Owner one complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with the hardware. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite type if not specifically recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 1. Door closers, exit devices and electronics (As applicable) shall be checked by the hardware distributor for proper operation. tr 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Furnish hardware items in the quantities indicated on Drawings unless additional hardware is required for a complete and operable facility. Ensure completeness, proper function and proper application of hardware for each door. B. Refer to Drawings Sheet SS1 for Hardware Group and Key and Lock Legend. END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE Section 08710 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc" —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Installing Contractor shall provide Glass and Glazing as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. The work includes without limitation: 1. Glass glazed into storefront frames and entry doors. 2. Mirrors at columns and Restrooms. 3. Spandrel Glass, only if shown on Exterior Elevations and Storefront Elevations. 4. Setting materials and cleaners. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 08400 - Entrances and Storefronts: Storefront glazing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE -kr 1 A. Comply with published recommendations, details and procedures of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless noted otherwise. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. Each piece of safety glass shall exhibit appropriate label. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM E1300, Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 3. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 16 CFR Part 1201 "Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials 4. Glass Association of North America (GANA - formerly the Flat Glass Marketing Association), °Glazing Manual". 5. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 24 - Glass and Glazing. 6. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA), TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines". B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of state and local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging and with labels intact, fully identified with trade name, color, size, hardness, type, class and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable material, shall be removed from site as directed by Owner's representative, and shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. during glazing unless the manufacturer of the glazing materials specifically agrees to installation of specified materials at lower temperatures. B. If job progress and other conditions require glazing work when temperatures are below 40 degrees F. (Or below the minimum temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure satisfactory work. Record in wilting to the manufacturer, with copy to the Owner's representative, the conditions under which such glazing work proceeds, and the provisions made to ensure satisfactory work. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. insulating Glass: Ten (10) years Manufacturer's Warranty against seal failure. Warranty shall be project specific. 2. The Mirror Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. Warranty shall be project specific. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with General Conditions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Primary Glass Products and Insulated Units: 1. Cardinal 1G. 2. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div. 3. Guardian Industries, Corp. 4. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 5. Viracon, Inc. 6. PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group (Primary glass only). B. Other Materials: As specified in Paragraph 2.02. GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.02 MATERIALS A. Clear W Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class I, Quality q3, clear. B. Tempered 'A" Float Glass: Float glass, which has been fully tempered, complying with ASTM C1048 and ANSI -Z97.1. 1. Tempered '/4" glass shall be tempered horizontally. Tong marks will not be permitted. 2. Identification: a. Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. C. Insulating Glass: 1" insulating glass complying with ASTM E774 tested and approved in accordance with SIGMA, Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association requirements. Provide following where shown: 1. Clear 1" annealed insulating glass, consisting of two (2) lites clear 'A" float glass with a 34" air space. Dual seal units with silicone secondary seal required. +r 2. Clear 1" laminated over tempered insulated glass consisting of an outboard lite of clear 3/8" laminated safety glass (2 lites 3/16" float with .030 interlayer). 3/8" air space, an inboard lite of clear %4" tempered float glass. Both laminated and tempered lite shall be permanently logoed with manufacturer's name, ASTM and ANZI compliance. Each insulated unit to be logoed. Units to be dual seal with silicone secondary seal required. 3. Starfire hew white laminated over tempered 1 1/8" insulated glass consisting of an outboard lite of 1/2" starfire hew white laminated safety glass (2 lites 1/4" starfire float with .030 hew white interlayer). 3/8" air space, an inboard lite of clear 1/4" tempered float glass. Both laminated and tempered lite shall be permanently logoed with manufacturer's name, ASTM and AND compliance. Units to be dual seal with silicone secondary seal required. D. Monolithic Laminated Glass: 1. Clear %" cat. 11 laminated glass with .030 interlayer each laminated lite to be permanently logoed with manufacturer's name, ASTM and ANZI compliance. 2. Color: Clear. E. Spandrel Glass shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Glass Thickness: %." heat strengthened, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Insulated Spandrel Glass Units (If applicable, see Exterior Elevations and Storefront Elevations for unit make-up). GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. Color: As shown on Drawings. 4. Identification: a. Tempered spandrel glass is exempted from permanent labeling but shaii be identified by the manufacturer with a removable paper label. 5. Location: Provided at exterior glazing locations where shown on Drawings. F. Mirror Glass: 114" thick, Quality q2, polished float glass mirror electrolytically copper plated with ground with flat polished edges with concealed fasteners. G. Provide column and restroom mirrors, including J moldings, mirror mastic, silicone sealant, trim angles and required fasteners. 1. Mirror trim for column and restroom application: prefinished extruded aluminum shapes by Sty?mark, Inc. (1-800-328-2495). a. Finish: Styimark Factory finish no.110 buffed brite natural. b. Stylmark mirror J moldings: No. 420107 - 5/8" and No. 420068 - 5/16. c. St'7flnark 1 x 1 x 1/16 trim angle: no. 110165 cut at 6" lengths and installed on top four corners of columns as detailed with silicone and double faced tape. 2. Mirror adhesive: "Premier," by Guenther. 3. Mirror overlap vertical joints at outside comers on columns. Mirrors shall be taped and flat tooled with silicone sealant to tie all 4 (four) sides of column mirrors together. 4. Silicone Sealant "Dow Corning 795 Black". 5. Do not install mirrors unless drywall has been properly sealed with primer as specified. H. Glazing tape for miscellaneous borrowed fites and doorfites. 1. Polyisobutylene/butyl "Tremco 440 Tape" by Tremco, inc. 2. "Extru-Seal" by Pecora. 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene blocks, 70 to 90 Type A durometer hardness. J. Spacers: Neoprene blocks, 40 to 50 Type A durometer hardness, 3" long, self- adhesive on 1 (one) face only. K. Dry Glazing Gaskets: 50 - 70 durometer hardness, extruded or molded neoprene, butyl or vinyl, color to match aluminum. 1. Thickness and configuration to suit metal sections used to provide 15 percent GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 1Z 2006 minimum compression around seal. Miter comers. L. Cleaners: Type recommended by gasket manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measure openings and cut glass accurately to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as specified by GANA. If glass is to be cut to size at project site, deliver each piece to Project site at least 2" larger (in both dimensions) than required, to facilitate the cutting of clean-cut edges without the necessity of seaming and nipping. 1. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip and abrade glass that is tempered, heat strengthened and coated. B. Clean glazing stops and rabbets to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious substances, which might impair the work. C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Pieces that have impact damage at edges, scratches and abrasion of faces and other evidence of damage shall not be installed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Set each piece with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. B. Locate setting blocks at the quarter points of sill, but no closer than 6" to corners of glass. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Provide spacers for glass to separate glass from stops, except where continuous gaskets or tape are required. Locate spacers 36" O.C.. maximum inside and out, with a minimum of 2 spacers per edge of glass. Provide width as required for a minimum of 3/8 bite on glass at all 4 edges. D. Butt or lap ends of sealant tape in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. E. Install spandrel glass where shown on Drawings. GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 F. Install toilet room mirrors plumb and level using concealed fasteners. G. Install column mirrors plumb and level with mirror adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions, and retained at top and bottom with aluminum J moldings specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or ribbons suitably attached to framing and held free of the glass. Warning markings shall not be applied directly to the glass. B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, cracked, chipped, or damaged, including vandalism and accidents during the construction period. C. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not become stained. D. Wash and polish glass on all faces just prior to final acceptance. Comply with printed instructions and recommendations of the glass manufacturer for cleaning. 3.05 STOREFRONT GLASS SCHEDULE r A, Refer to Kart Entry Prototype Drawings for additional information. B. Storefront Glass Schedule: 1. '/" clear laminated safety glass (.030 inner layer). 2. 1" clear laminated/tempered insulated silicone sealed: a. 3/8" clear laminated (2 lites 3/16" float .030 interlayer). Outboard lite. b. 3/8" air space. c. 1/4" clear tempered inboard lite. 3. 1" clear annealed insulating silicone sealed: a. 1/4" clear annealed outboard lite. b. 1/2" air space. d. 1/4" clear annealed inboard lite. 4. Starfire hew white laminated/tempered 1 1/8" insulated a. 1/2" hew white starfire annealed laminated (2 lites 1/4" starfire float with .030 hew white interlayer) b. 3/8" air space. c. 1/4" clear tempered. Inboard lite. 5. Clear %4" tempered float. 6. Clear'/"annealed float. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08800 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Gypsum Wall and Ceiling systems and accessories, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Gypsum board walls. 2. Gypsum board ceilings. B. National Account: United States Gypsum (USG) Corp. See Vendor Contact List an KOHLaborate web site for contact information. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related work specified elsewhere includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. 2. Section 07200 - Insulation. t= 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide gypsum drywall construction fire -resistance ratings indicated, conforming to assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by inspecting and testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Where gypsum drywall systems with fire -resistance ratings are indicated and where required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL, FM and A.I.A. C. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings or specified herein: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM C645, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. b. ASTM C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 2. Gypsum Association (GA): a. Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard, GA -216. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 b. Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish GA -214 jointly published by AWCI, CISCA, GA, and PDCA. 3. Cold -formed metal framing and related work shall be designed in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (A1S1) "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". D. Conform to Intemational Building Code (IBC): 1. Chapter 7 — Fire Resistance Rated Construction. 2. Chapter 25 — Gypsum Board and Plaster. E. The design and construction of gypsum wallboard assemblies specified herein shall meet the requirements of IBC, relative to a seismic zone D, minimum. F. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. G. Installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the wallboard materials. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Delivery and Handling: ;r 1. Dever materials to the project site with manufacturers labels intact and legible. 2. Handle materials with care to prevent damage. B. Storage: 1. Keep materials dry and protect from weather. 2. Store materials inside under cover, stack flat, off floor. 3. Stack wallboard so that long lengths are not over short lengths. 4. Do not overload the floor system. 5. Store adhesives in dry area, provide protection against freezing. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: During cold weather, in areas receiving wallboard installation, maintain temperature range between 55 degrees F to 70 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and after wallboard and joint treatment application. 2. Ventilation: a. Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint treatment applications. b. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation. c. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint material. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 d. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Gypsum Wallboard, Sheathing, and Finishing Compound: 1. National Account United States Gypsum (USG) Corp. See Vendor Contact List on KOHLaborate web site for contact information. C. Steel Framing: 1. Gypsum wallboard and sheathing manufacturers specified above. 2. Refer to Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing for other acceptable manufacturers. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum W011board: Tapered edge, thickness as shown on Drawings: 1. Regular: ASTM C36. 2. Type X: ASTM C36. 3. Water resistant: ASTM C630. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Square edge, thickness as shown on Drawings, ASTM C36: 1. Special Size: 24" x 144"; for use with slotted standard steel studs. C. Gypsum Wallboard for Garcy studs: Square edge, 5/8" thick, or as shown on Drawings, conforming to ASTM C36. D. Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Typical: Square edge, 1/2" thick for 16" stud spacing and 5/8" for 24" stud spacing, ASTM C79. 2. Where required, provide fiberglass faced board, square edge, 112" thick, ASTM C79, with silicone treated gypsum core and surfaced with inorganic glass facers, Dens -Glass Gold® by Georgia-Pacific Corp. http://www.op.com E. Exterior Gypsum Board Ceiling Materials: 1. Ceiling Joists and Runners: ASTM C 955; 20 gage galvanized sheet steel, Cee shaped. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X, 518" thick, gypsum wallboard manufactured to produce extra resistance to moisture and sagging. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 a. Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board by US Gypsum. F Screws: Type S and S-12 buglehead and panhead, sized to suit thickness. 1. Type S-12 buglehead for attachment of gypsum sheathing to steel studs, corrosion resistant treated, ASTM C954. G. Adhesive: As recommended by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer. H. Metal Framing and Accessories: Refer to Section 05400 for description and details. 1. Metal Furring Channels: 24 gage, electro -galvanized steel, hat -shaped, sizes as shown on !Drawings. a. Where shown as "Resilient", provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce sound transmission. 3. Furring Z -Channels: a. 26 gage (0.0179" minimum), hot dipped galvanized steel, slotted web, 3/4" and 1-1/4" flange widths, depth as shown. I. Clips: Galvanized 5feel wire or sheet metal devices designed for attachment of furring members td supports or to each other. J. Wire Ties: Soft galvanized steel wire, not less than 16 gage for tying furring channels to runner channels, and not less than 18 gage for other ties. K. Hangers: 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire. L. Backer Plates: 1. 20 gage, galvanized per ASTM B633. 2. Type RS or heavier sizes as required, for fastening to channels for attachment of fixtures, accessories, and similar items. M. Accessories: Comer reinforcements, casing beads and metal trim, fabricated from minimum 0.012" galvanized sheet steel with perforated flanges, designed to receive joint compound. N. Control Joints: Roll -formed zinc, or extruded vinyl as standard with the wallboard manufacturer. O. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C475. P. Acoustical Sealant: Non-drying, permanently flexible, synthetic rubber based. 1. "Acoustical Sealant BA -98" by Pecora Corp. 2. "Acoustical Sealant" by Tremco, Inc. 3. Or gypsum wallboard manufacturer's recommended sealant. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 Q. Ceiling Accessories: 1. Light Cove Molding by Fypon, Ltd., 960 West Barre Rd. Archbold, OH 43502. Phone (800) 446-3040, Fax (800) 446-9373 http:I/www.fypon.com/ a. Model MLD 583-16. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Steel Studs and Framing: 1. Size and spacing of Studs: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and as otherwise shown or specified herein. a. Frame door openings with vertical studs securely attached by screws at each jamb either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frame; install runner track sections (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1) Provide runner tracks of same gage as jamb studs. Space jack studs same as partition studs. 2) Install 20 -gage studs at each jamb for doors 2-8" wide to 4'-0" wide weighing not more than 200 lbs.; and for doors less than 2'-8" wide weighing more than 100 lbs. but not more than 200 lbs. 3) Install double 20 -gage studs at each jamb for single doors up to 4'-0" wide weighing more than 200 lbs. but not more than 300 lbs. b. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. c. Space wall furring members 24" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at comers and ends of runner tracks. a. Isolation of Partitions from Structure: Where partitions abutt ceiling, deck construction and vertical structural elements, provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended by stud manufacturer to prevent the transfer of structural Toads and movements to partitions. 1) Deflection track shall accommodate up to 1-1/2" deflection; GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09260 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 provide minimum 3" track depth. b. Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as Indicated to the structural support and substrate above the ceiling unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3. install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. 4. Install steel studs with integral slotted standards at walls indicated on Drawings. B. Metal Suspension System: 1. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 2. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. 3. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each nlhher and transversely between parallel runners. 4. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 5. Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. 6. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated. 7. Do not suspend from mechanical or electrical equipment. C. Direct -hung Metal Support System: 1. Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join support members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. D. Wallboard: 1. Install acoustical insulation and fire safing as indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. 2. Install acoustical sealants per Section 07920. 3. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not Tess than 1' -0" in alternate courses of board. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 4. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end -butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'-0". 5. Install wall and partition boards perpendicular to framing (long edges of board at right angles to framing members) for walls 8'-1" and Tess in height using maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. If ceiling height is greater than 8'- 1", or wall is 4'-0" wide or less, install boards parallel to framing (long edges of board parallel to framing members). a. In fire rated assemblies, verify installation procedures with manufacturer. b. Install special sized gypsum board full height without horizontal joints in field of board and between steel studs with slotted standards. c. Where double -layer application is shown for fire -resistive rated assemblies, fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. Install base layer perpendicular to framing members and face layer parallel to framing member. d. Gypsum board joints at openings shall be located so that no joint will align with edges of opening unless control joints wilt be installed at these points. 1: 6. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged and damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. 7. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges and ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. 8. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. 9. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. 10. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (e.g. above ceilings), except in chase walls which are braced internally. a. Coverage may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage, except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air and smoke ratings. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 11. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J -type semi -finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks. 12. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board with "floating" intemal corner construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated, unless control and expansion joints are indicated, and unless fire rating is indicated. 13. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with GA -216 and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. 14. Install water resistant gypsum wallboard on all walls in toilet rooms and at plumbing walls and similar wet areas in other rooms or spaces. a. Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water- resistant sealer before installation as recommended by manufacturer. 15. Seal joints, seal the perimeter of, and openings in drywall construction containing acoustical insulation, with acoustical sealant E. Sheathing: 1. Attach sheathing to exterior studs with corrosion -resistant screws at 8" o.c. and 3/8" from ends and edges. Where sheathing is backup for masonry veneer, apply building paper horizontally to face of sheathing beginning at the bottom of the wall, and lap each layer 2", allowing 6" at end laps, fasten with corrosion -resistant staples. Cut back felt 112" on each side of break in supporting members where control joints will be located. F. Accessories: 1. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and printed recommendations. a. Install metal comer beads at external comers of drywall work. b. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi -finishing type is indicated. 2. Install metal or vinyl control joints where indicated, but not to exceed 30 feet o.c. maximum for walls, and 50 feet o.c. maximum for ceilings whether indicated or not. In addition, ceilings shall not exceed 2500 S.F. 3.02 CEILING INSTALLATION A. Installation of Ceiling Joists: GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to joists, install joists in accordance with GA -201 and GA -216. 2. Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 8. Install joists in direction of shortest span, parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. 9. Install joists in one-piece full length. Splicing of joists not permitted. 10. Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framing with minimum 2 screws per stud and at comers and ends. 11. Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange. 12. Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1 '/z inch rolled channels screw attached to joists. B. Unless otherwise shown, install suspended ceilings in accordance with the following requirements. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install 1 1/z" cold rolled channels 4'-0" O.C. with 8 ga hanger wire spaced a max of 4'-0" O.C. along carrying channels. 3. Attach 718" screw furring channels spaced 16" O.C. perpendicular to the 1 '/" channel with double strand of saddle tied # 16 ga galvanized tie wire or 1 '/Z" furring channel clips. 4. Apply '/" gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the furring channels. Attach gypsum board with 1" self drilling drywall screws 12" O.C. in the field of the board 8" or 12" O.C. at butt joints, located not more than 1/2" from edges. 5. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 6. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 7. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 11. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. Where applicable, install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. D. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. E. Place gypsum pangs over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with'framing members. F. Install fasteners from center of field of panel toward ends and edges. Install fasteners 12 inches on center, perimeter and field. G. Install light cove molding per Fypon manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR GYPSUM SOFFIT BOARD A. Install framing studs for exterior gypsum soffit at spacing shown. B. Apply 5/8" gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the studs. C. Attach soffit board with 1" self drilling drywall screws 24" O.C. in the field of the board 8" or 12" O.C. at butt joints, located not more than'/2' from edges. D. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with joint compound recommended by manufacturer. Treat prior to installation. 3.04 FINISHES A. Wallboard Finishing: 1. Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare wallboard for finish. Prefiil open joints, rounded and beveled edges as applicable, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 a. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. b. Sand after last coat, between coats if necessary to produce desired finish. c. Wallboard finishing including joint treatment and nail or screw dimple treatment shall be complete to finished floor. 2. Levels of finishing shall comply with those established by reference in GA 214 except as follows: a. Level 5: Exterior gypsum board canopy ceiling and interior gypsum board ceiling at entry. b. Level 4: In finished spaces scheduled for painting, and wall coverings. c. Level 3 : Exterior exposed gypsum surfaces. d. Leve! 2: For wallboard scheduled to receive ceramic tile, and in exposed spaces not painted. e. Level 1: For concealed spaces, such as attic plenum. is B. Painted Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Exposed exterior gypsum sheathing to receive paint finish shall be prepared as follows in accordance with manufacturers instructions: 1. Apply fiberglass mesh joint tape over joints and embed in setting -type joint compound. 2. Skim coat surface with setting -type joint compound for smooth finish. 3. Provide paint finish as specified in Section 09900. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces against damage. Repair or replace damaged surfaces as required and as approved by Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION GYPSUM WALLBOARD Section 09250 -11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09260 EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Exterior Sheathing Gypsum Board as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Dens -Glass Gold® Sheathing Board for exterior wall sheathing. 2. Dens -Deck® board for parapet walls sheathing only. 3. Dens -Glass Gold® Exterior Sheathing Panels for soffit. 4. Exterior Grade Gypsum Board for soffit (Optional). 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 04250 - Masonry Veneer. 2. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. 3. Section 05700 - Miscellaneous Metals. 4. Section 06100 - Carpentry. 5. Section 072`4'0 - Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS). 6. Section 07920 - Sealants. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. Intemational Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 25 — Gypsum Board and Plaster. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations Jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE of local authorities having installations similar to those A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Store level and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to weather, breakage and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials. C. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dens -Glass Gold® product limitations: 1. Do not use sheathing board as a base for nailing or mechanical fastening. Fasteners should be flush to the face of the board, not countersunk. 2. Do not use forced air heaters, thus creating volumes of water vapor which, when not properly vented, can condense on building materials. Consult heater manufacturer for proper use and ventilation. Avoid conditions that will create moisture in the air and condensation on the exterior walls during periods when the exterior temperature is lower than the interior. 3. When sheathing board panels are used in slanted wall applications, that portion of the wall must be temporarily protected from the elements by the use of a weather barrier such as #15 felt prior to application of the cladding. Exposed wall ends such as may be found in parapets must be covered to prevent wdt&r from infiltrating the cavity. 4. Do not laminate sheathing board to masonry surfaces; use furring strips or framing spaced at manufacturer's specifications. 5. Sheathing board is not a structural product and should not be used in lieu of plywood where required. 6. Do not apply sheathing board below grade. 7. Sheathing board is not intended for immersion in water or sustained exposure to water and moisture. Cascading roof/floor water should be directed away from the sheathing until appropriate drainage is installed. B. For all installations, design details such as fasteners, sealants and control joints per system specifications. These items must be properly installed per manufacturer's system specifications. Openings and penetrations must be properly flashed and sealed. C, Caution: Dens -Glass Gold® contains continuous filament fiberglass. Contractor shall adhere to manufacturer's printed safety recommendations during construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1. GP Georgia Pacific, 133 Peachtree St. N.E. 8th Floor Atlanta, GA, Phone: (800) 284-5347 tittp:i/www.gp.cQm/buildiProductGroup.aspx?pid=1064. 2. Optional Soffit board: National Account United States Gypsum (USG) Corp. See Vendor Contact List on Buzzsaw web site for contact information. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Exterior Wall Sheathing: Dens -Glass Gold® Sheathing Board, ICC Evaluation NER-574, ER -4305 http:/lwww.icc-es.org1 1. Size: a. Dens -Glass Gold® sheathing: H" (12.7mm) thick by 4' by 8', 9' or 10' (1.9 ib. per square foot). b. Dens -Glass Gold Fireguard® Sheathing: Nominal L" (15.9mm) thick by 4' by 8', 9' or 10' (2.5 Ib. per square foot). 2. Fire resistance: a. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. b. - H" 'Or L" Dens -Glass Gold® sheathing: Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c. L" Dens -Glass Gold Fireguard®: Sheathing is rated "Type X" as defined in ASTM C36 when tested according to ASTM E119. d. Dens -Glass Gold Fireguard® sheathing is UL classified, Type DGG in UL designs N501, N502, N505, U301, U302, U305, U309, U337, U411, U425, U467, U473, X508, X516. 3. Composition: a. Gypsum sheathing manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1177 with glass mats both sides and long edges, water-resistant treated core. 4. Accessories: a. Joint tape: 2" wide, 10 x 10 glass mesh tape. b. Joint compound: G -P Gypsum setting -type joint compound. c. Nails, wood framing: Hot dip, 11 -gauge galvanized nails with 7116" head, 1%' min. length. d. Screws, metal framing: 1) Type S-12, bugle head, self -tapping, rust -resistant, fine thread for heavy -steel gauge (12 to 22). EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2) Type S, bugle head, rust -resistant sharp point, fine thread for Tight -gauge metal framing or furring. e. Screws, metal or wood framing: 1) Wafer head, rust -resistant, Type S-12 drill or Hi -Lo, min. 1" length. 2) Type W rust -resistant, bugle head, coarse thread, sharp point for wood. f. Sealants, caulk and tape: 1) Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895, Or equivalent 2) Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent; Pecora AC -20 acrylic latex sealant; GE Silicone Silpruf Sealant; Tremco Dymonic. 3) 2" wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent. 5. Building Paper (If required): a. -/ - No. 15, non -perforated, asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1 or equal. B. Parapet Wall Sheathing: Dens -Deck® board, as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 1. Fire Resistance: a. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 5. Composition: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum pane! with water resistant core. 6. Size: a. Nominal: 4' x 8' (special order 4' x 4'), with square edges. b. Thickness: %" thick minimum. C. Exterior Soffit Sheathing: Dens -Glass Gold® Exterior Sheathing Panels, conforming to ASTM C1177. 1. Size: Nominal width 4', by 8', 9', 10' ±1/4" standard length, % thick. 3. Fire Resistance: a. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board (Optional): ASTM C 1396, Type X, W thick, gypsum wallboard manufactured to produce extra resistance to moisture and sagging. 1. Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board by United States Gypsum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements goveming substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and applicable instructions in ASTM C1280. B. Dens -Glass Gold® Exterior Wail Sheathing: 1. Install sheathing with gold side out. 2. Use maximtiFn lengths possible to minimize number of joints. 3. Metal framing: C. a. Attach sheathing to metal framing with screws spaced 8" O.C. at perimeter where there are framing supports; and 8" Q.C. along intermediate framing in field. b. Attach brick veneer by means of brick ties through the sheathing and into the framing. 7. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink. 8. Locate fasteners per manufacturer's specifications. 9. Building Paper. If required, install building paper with flashing around openings. 10. Finishing: a. Seal fasteners using Dow Coming 795 or Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. b. Finish joints using Dow Coming 795 or Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent. Dens -Deck® Parapet Wall Framing and Fastening: 1. Borden HPPG Elmers Borden HPPG Elmers Reinforce with 2" wide Maximum framing spacing for W Dens -Deck® panels shall be 16" O.C. EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Fasten with corrosion -resistant fasteners at a maximum 8" O.C. around the perimeter and 8" O.C. on framing members in the field of the panel. D. Exterior Soffit Sheathing: Install Dens -Glass Gold® Exterior Sheathing Panels per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1. Maximum framing spacing shall be 16" O.C. 2. Fasten with corrosion -resistant fasteners at a maximum 8" O.C. along framing. E. Installation of Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board (Optional): 1. Install framing studs for exterior gypsum soffit at spacing shown. 2. Apply %" gypsum board with its long dimension at right angles to the studs. Attach soffit board with 1" self -drilling drywall screws 24" O.C. in the field of the board 8" or 12" O.C. at butt joints, located not more than 1/2" from edges. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces against damage. Repair or replace damaged surfaces as required and as apf oved by Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION EXTERIOR SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD Section 09260 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09290 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Glass Reinforced Cement (GRC) custom decorative panels and canopy surround trim, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 05000 - 2. Section 05400 3. Section 07920 4. Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: r B. C. Structural Steel. - Lightgage Metal Framing. - Sealants. - Painting. 1. AS1111 International (ASTM): a. The standards referred .1 ASTM C473 .2 ASTM C473 .3 ASTM C957 .4 ASTM D256 .5 ASTM D638 .6 ASTM D638 .7 ASTM D696 .8 ASTM D790 .9 ASTM D790 .10 ASTM D2583 .11 ASTM E 84 .12ASTM E84 to below shall apply to work under this section Nail Pull Resistance Humidified Deflection Elastic Limits Impact Resistance Ultimate Tensile Strength Young's Modulus Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus Barcol Hardness Flame Spread Index Smoke Developed Index Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. Installer: 5 years experience in successful installations similar to those specified herein. Installer must be acceptable to the System manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site cushioned and blocked to prevent damage, in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Store in manufacturer's original packaging until ready for use. Protect from damage and exposure to moisture and the elements. GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) Section 09290 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Damaged or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be immediately removed from the Project site, and shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain heat in the areas of the Work when the outside temperature is below 558 F as required and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Heat shall be provided continuously and uniformly at a minimum 558 F or as recommended by the manufacturer, from 1 (one) week prior to start of installation, until GRC application is completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturer. All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. DecoForm Corp. 270 Rexdale Blvd., Etobicoke, Ontario, Canada. Telephone: (416) 745-4970, FAX: (416) 745-6636 http://www.decoform.com/ 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS, unless approved in writing by Kohl's Dept. Stores. 202 MATERIALS A. GRC decorative panels and canopy surround trim, custom made for Kohl's Dept. Stores: 1. Glass Reinforced Cement units shall be prefabricated with glassfiber reinforced cement and suitably reinforced with wood and/or steel as required. B. Accessories: GRC manufacturer's recommended products as appropriate for the design and conditions shown. 1. Adhesives: Construction adhesive as recommended by the GRC manufacturer. 2. Fastemers: Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. Al other fastening or attachment devices shall be plated or galvanized. 2. Patching Compound: Cementitious patching compound for filling holes and patching minor damage. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Molds for GRC fabrications shall be rigid and constructed of materials that will provide smooth, finished products and relief, conforming to design, profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings. GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) Section 09290 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Tolerances (Fabrication): 1. Dimensional - all directions: (0' — 10') ± 1I8". 2. Dimensional — all directions (11' — 20'): +1- 3116" 3. Straightness along the edge of surface: ± 118"/linear foot. 4. Thickness - shell: + 114" minimum. 5. Reveals: 5° draft angles. 6. Comers: 1/16" -118" radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements goveming substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. All surfaces or framing structures shall be plumb and true as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set GRC fabrications accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and secured in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and approved shop drawings. ,: B. Provide temporary supports to maintain position as required. C. Fasten units with screws through the face of the GRC units, or from the rear as indicated. D. Adequate control and/or expansion joints shall be employed E. Pre -drill fastener holes in GRC components. F. Attach GRC components to framing and substrate with steel drill screws. Do not use pneumatic staple guns. Countersink screw heads below adjoining finished surface. G. Fasten not Tess than 5/16" from edge or end. H. Cover screw heads with exterior grade compound to produce a smooth, flush, and level surface. I. Caulk joints where required with a one -compound elastomeric low modulus urethane sealant equivalent to Sonolastic Ultra. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation of the individual units, fill screw holes and minor damage with patching compound, then sand smooth. Use Auto Body filler or a polymer modified cementious product with migrating corrosion inhibitors equivalent to Sika Top to repair any defects and areas requiring patching. The entire assembly shall be rigid and shall present a smooth finished assembly ready to receive sealants and paint. GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) Section 09290 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Clean exposed surfaces with detergent and water as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Protect all exposed surfaces from damage as required and as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) Section 09290 -4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Install Owner fumished Porcelain Tile as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. 1. Owner will furnish porcelain tile, setting and grouting materials for Contractor's installation. B. Type of Installation: 1. Porcelain Tile over Slab -on -Grade. 2. ,.Exterior Porcelain Tile. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07920 - Sealants. 2. Section 09305 - Cement Board. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z a. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile. b. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. c. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework. d. ANSI A118 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. e. ANSI A118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. f. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts. g. ANSI A137.1 - Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 12 — Interior Environment. b. Chapter 21— Masonry. CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 -1 Deleted: KOHL% Department Store. Inc. — Hazel Den, WA/ Project No. 30651 September 13, 200611 Deleted: cPorce ain Tile over Suspended Naomi Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Deleted: glbSe :ion 14244 - Hydraulic Passenger Elevators: Cab floorine.9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 4. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): a. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile installation, interior and exterior methods. B. ADA Compliance: Floor tile shall have a static coefficient of friction (COF) of not less than 0.6 wet. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Accept delivery of Owner furnished material only in an undamaged condition; store above ground and in a dry place within the building. Packaged material shall be in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Wrapped or bundled material shall bear the name of the manufacturer and the product. B. Deliver to job site and store packaged material in original containers with labels intact Handle and store materials per manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Prevent damage to materials by water, freezing or other causes. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F in tiled areas during installation, and for 7 days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by manufacturer's instructions. tr B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to avoid carbon dioxide buildup and damage to new tile work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: Ail materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. B. Materials furnished by Owner for Contractor to install: 1. Porcelain Tile: a. International Stone. b. Graniti Fiandre. 2. Setting and Grouting Materials. 3. Other Materials: As specified in Par. 2.02 of this Section. 2.02 MATERIALS CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 - 2 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WA' Project No. 30854 September 13, 20084 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12. 2006 A Owner fumished Interior Porcelain Tile: 1. International Stone or Graniti Fiandre, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. a. Nominal size: 12" x 12" face size. b. Nominal size: 16" x 16" face size. c. Location, colors, pattems and additional information: As shown on Drawings. B. Owner furnished Glass Tile: 1. Refer to Drawings for dimensions, patterns, colors, locations and additional information. C. Owner fumished Exterior Porcelain Tile: 1. Refer to Drawings for dimensions, patterns, colors, locations and additional information. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. E. Sand: ASTM C144. F. Water. Clean, free from deleterious substances. G. Dry -Set Mortar. 1. KERABOND by Mapei. a. Owner fumistuad. H. Acrylic Latex Additive: 1. KERALASTIC by Mapei. a. Owner fumished. Grout 1. KERACOLOR S by Mapei. a. Owner furnished. 2. KERACOLOR U by Mapei. a, Owner furnished. Marble Thresholds: Sound Group "A" marble with an abrasive hardness of not less, than 10.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM 0241. CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 - 3 Deleted: KOHL% Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Den, WA/ Project No. 3085 September 13, 20061 Deleted: J. Waterproof Membrane: CPE membrane laminated to non- woven high strength polyester fiber, 30 mil thick (overall thickness)./ 1 1. "Nobleseal TS' by Noble Co./ 2. 'Kenn" by Schluter Systems L.P.11 3. Or approved equivalent./ Deleted: K KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 Floor Setting Beds: 1. Over Slab -On -Grade. a. Dry -Set Mortar. Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. b. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar, by volume (Optional, unless specifically indicated in Par. 3.07 - Schedule): 1) One part Portland cement, 1 part fine dry sand and latex liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. Interior Wall Setting Beds: 1. Over Cement Board. a. Dry -Set Mortar: Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar, by volume (Optional, unless specifically indicated): M. Interior Setting 1) One part Portland cement, 1 part fine dry sand and latex (quid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. Beds Grout: 1. Dry -Set Grout Factory pre -mix with water added in accordance with the manufacturers recorsrtnendations. 2. latex -Portland Cement Grout Sand -Portland cement grout, or dry -set grout, with latex liquid added in lieu of water to produce a workable mix. Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WAg Project No. 306511 September 13, 200611 Deleted: L 1 Deleted: 11 2. Over Suspended Floors.¶ 11 a. Latex Portland cement membrane bond coat, waterproof sheet membrane, and latex Portland cement mortar as specified above for slab-on-grade.11 11 tDeleted: M --(Deleted: N Z)., Tile and Grout Cleaner. Tile & Grout Cleaner as manufactured by Custom Building _.--- Products. 1. Acid based cleaning products are prohibited. Grout Sealer Penetrating Grout Release Sealer, water based, as manufactured by Custom Building Products. _ Crack Isolatiort_Membrane: , 1. `Protecto Wrap AFM" Anti -Fracture Membrane as manufactured by Protecto Wrap Co. htto:/lwww.orotectowrao.com/catfloorafm.pho Q. Weather Resistant Barrier. 4. 1. "Tyvek CommercialWrap' non -perforated secondary weather resistant barrier as manufactured by DuPont, or equal. Install between cement board and metal studs at Gateway porcelain tile, as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 - 4 { Deleted: 0 {Deleted: P Deleted: Q fFormatted: Bullets and Numbering KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12. 2006 T. a. Attach weather resistant barrier over metal studs with 1 5/6" rust resistant screws with 2° diameter plastic cap. b. Overlap barrier at comers by a minimum of 12". c. Overlap barrier vertical seams by a minimum of 6". d. Tape all horizontal and vertical seams of barrier with DuPont Tyvek Tape, or equal. e. Seal all tears and cuts in Air Barrier with DuPont Tyvek Tape, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUitON 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Work shall not commence until grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, and similar items, have been installed, and until adjoining work is satisfactorily protected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Layout tie in each area in such a manner as to minimize the cutting of tile. 1. Locate cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. 2. Align wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb and level. 3. Align floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls. B. Cracks and unstable subfloor or slab surfaces within ceramic tile floor areas shall be covered with a crack isolation membrane 12" wide centered on the crack and applied per manufacturer's instructions. Verify with Kohl's Construction Manager. C. Install exterior wall accent tiles at locations and in pattem as indicated on the Drawings. D. Refer to Drawings for locations and additional information. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR WALL TILE A. Metaf stud, cement board walls: 1. Dry -Set Mortar or Latex Portland cement Mortar, per TCA Method W243. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE AND BASE A. Concrete Subfloor (Slab -On -Grade): CERAMIC TILE Section 09300.5 Deleted: KOHL's Department Store, Inc.— Hazel Deli, WA9 Project No. 30651 September 13, 200611 KOHL'S Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12. 2006 1. Dry -Set Mortar or Latex -Portland cement Mortar, per TCA Method F113. Z. Construct expansion and control joints in accordance with TCA Method E J171. ,Ex Setting Base: Install base with Mex -Portland cement mortar, directly to substrate_ Apply mortar with the flat side of trowel and comb with the serrated or notched side of trowel. Press the base firmly into place and tap lightly to ensure maximum bond. Joints of the `. base shall be of the same width and align with the joints of the floor tile insofar as practicable. 'Back butter' every individual floor tile to ensure proper adhesion to substrate. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Install marble thresholds in same type of setting bed as abutting field the unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in thinset mortar where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent non -tile floor finish. 2. Refer to Drawings for locations and additional information. 3.06 GROUTING A. After tile is firmly set, fill joints with appropriate Dement grout. Spread slurry of grout over the floor surfaces until joints are filled, Remove loose mortar, laitanoe or materials detrimental to bond before applying setting beds. 1. On walls, after tile hers %et, force a maximum of grout into joints. Fill joints flush with surfacett.file. Before grout sets, fill skips and gaps. Tool joints to cushion edge of tile. Face of the shall be left dean and free from grout and other stains. B. Damp mop grouted floors twice daily for not less than 7 days following installation. C. Grout Sealer. • Apply grout sealer to floor and wall joints in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Allow grout joints to cure for 28 days prior to sealing. 2. Clean joints removing all surface soil and stains prior to sealing. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WALL TILE A. Install per manufacturer's printed installation instructions and TCA standards for exterior tile application. B. Shelf Angles: 1. Provide shelf angles for support of the porcelain tile where tiled wall height exceeds 30 ft (9.1 m) from foundation to top of wall, unless otherwise required by the local Authority having jurisdiction. 1. Shelf angles shall be placed above expansion joint. CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 - 6 Deleted: KOHL', Department Store, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WAq Project No. 3os5q September 13. 200611 Deleted: B. Concrete Subfloor (Suspended Floors) with Waterproof Membrane:1 4 1. TCA Method F 122-02.11 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", first Zine: 0" Deleted: C Deleted: D Deleted: E KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Shelf angles shall not be installed as one continuous member. 3. Shelf angles must provide continuous support around comers. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A At completion of installation, thoroughly dean all surfaces. Use of acid will not be permitted. Use clean water in initial deaning. Remove all stains, mortar, etc. B. Protect floors in areas subject to construction traffic. C. Before traffic is permitted over finished tile floors, cover per specs on FDN sheet. D. Remove crooked, broken or damaged tile; replace with new. Immediately prior to occupancy by the Owner, wash the surfaces again, and perform additional grouting that may be necessary. Clean and polish finish floors. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Tile Setting Methods: 1. Walls, typical: TCA Method W243-02. 2. Floors, typical: TCA Method F113-02. a. Use latex modified setting bed and grout in toilets. tt * END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE Section 09300 - 7 Deleted: KOHL'; Department Stora, Inc. — Hazel Dell, WAS Project No. 30669 September 13, 200611 Deleted: 3. Suspended Floors: TCA Method F122-02.$ 1i a Use latex modified setting bed and grout in all ereas.11 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09305 CEMENT BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Cement Board as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Fasteners and accessories, as required for a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 05400 - Lightgage Metal Framing. 2. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM -International (ASTM). a. ASTM C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. B. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply cement board, finish and tile if the air temperature is below 40° F. B. Do not apply finishes, leveling/skim and base coats to a wet or frozen cement board. C. Conform to cement board manufacturer's requirements and printed instructions for exterior installation. CEMENT BOARD Section 09305 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.06 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of ten (10) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Specified Manufacturer All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. National Account: United States Gypsum (USG) Corp. See Vendor Contact List on Buzzsaw web site for contact information. 2.02 MATERIALS A Cement Board: 1. Water durable, mold resistant cement board for exterior application, with ceramic tilg ireneer. -t a. Durock® Brand Cement Board by USG, ICBG Report Number NER 259 http://www.icc-es.org/reports/odf files/NES/NER-259.pdf 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. B. Materials: 1. Cement Board: 4' wide x 8' long, with square edges; thickness varies. 2. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant Durock Brand steel screws, to be used with a minimum 20 -gauge metal studs at 16" O.C. maximum spacing. 3. Joint Tape: Durock Brand exterior joint tape. 4. Weather Resistant Barrier. StuccoWrap by Tyvek http://construcction.tyvek.com/ as required by the USG manufacturer. 5. Mortar. Latex -modified Portland cement. 6. Other Accessories: As required by the USG manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION CEMENT BOARD Section 09305-2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements goveming substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install Durock Brand cement board in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, in locations shown on Drawings. 1. Conform to USG manual SA -700 for exterior applications. B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches as required. Replace damaged work as directed by Owners representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION CEMENT BOARD Section 09305 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Acoustical Ceilings as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Acoustical ceilings. 2. Suspended ceiling grid. 3. Accessories, as required for a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 15 - Mechanical: Grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. 2. Division 16 - Electrical: Lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE tr A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM Intemational (ASTM). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 7 - Fire Resistance Rated Construction. b. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. c. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum documented experience in installations similar to those specified herein. D. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Surfaces to receive acoustical treatment shall be free from irregularities and level to within 1/4" in 12 feet. 2. Deflection: a. Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting Tight fixtures, ceiling grilles and acoustical units shall have maximum deflection 1/360 of the span. b. Deflection Test: ASTM C635. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09510 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. F. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components, and partition system, as applicable. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units. D. Replace damaged materials at no cost to Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS r A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete including Owner's vendor installed equipment, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturer. All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. NO SUBSTITUTIONS will be allowed on this Project. 1. Ceiling Tile and Suspension Systems: National Account United States Gypsum (USG) Corp. See Vendor Contact List on Sheet DS1 for contact information. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Panels, complying with ASTM E1264. 1. General Areas: USG #2310 "Radar", 24" x 48" x 518", white. 2. Service Desk Area: USG #4221 "Olympia Micro ClimaPlus," 24" x 24" x 5/8", white. 3. Rest Rooms: USG #2862 "Radar ClimaPlus Illusion," 24" x 48" x 3/4". white. 4. No tile substitutions allowed. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09510 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc.. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Suspension System: Direct -hung, non -rated, double web steel suspension system complete with main tees, cross tees, splices, seismic strut, wall moldings and accessories. Comply with ASTM C635. C. Accessories. 1. USG Compasso Suspension Trim, 4", white. 1. Donn DX by USG. Heavy Duty, 15/16" exposed grid face. 12' main runners and 4' cross -tees, white factory finish. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2. Spacer Bars: 'V' shaped galvanized steel bars, notched to fit over grid components. 3. Seismic Strut (As required by local Code): Refer to Drawings for schedules and details. a. EMT Strut at 12'-0" O.C., maximum 6'-0" from edges. b. Alternate Seismic Post: Refer to Drawings for schedule and details. 4. Hold -Down Clips: Furnish and install hold-down clips for lay -in ceiling units in public toilet rooms. ,t 5. HanIers: 12 gauge galvanized steel wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements goveming substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Verify dimensions for each ceiling area in field. Avoid the use of less -than -hal width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans where specifically shown on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements where indicated, Industry standards applicable to the work, and these specifications. 3. The finished system shall be true and level. Panels shall be installed so as to form straight true lines and cross lines. Adjacent panels shall match in appearance and shall be from one "factory run". 4. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (As applicable) ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09510 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 as shown on reflected ceiling plans. 5. Frame access panels and other openings on 4 sides with 1-112" runner channel; each frame to be supported by a hanger at each end. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and space 4'-0" along each carrying channel and direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, eider directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age and elevated temperatures. 2. Space hangers not more than 8" from ends, not more than 4'-0" o.c. between ends of main runners, and as required to support other work resting in and on ceiling. Where spans exceed the recommended and specified spans, provide larger main runners or additional reinforcing. 3. DO NOT attach hangers to metal decking. 4. System shall not be supported from electrical conduit, mechanical ducts, pipes, or e'uipment. 5. Coordinate spacing of hangars, carrying channels, runners and moldings with the location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in and on ceilings. 6. Do not bear main runners on walls and partitions. 7. Miter grid comers. Provide finish channels at exposed edges. 8. Center runners to align with light fixtures, and other visual components, as applicable. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before beginning construction if layout is not specifically shown on Drawings. 9. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely. C. Light Fixture Support 1. Ceiling grid that directly supports strip type light fixtures shall be secured to structure above by not less than 2 wire hangers per fixture. Each wire hanger shall be located directly above Tight fixture attachment to grid, insofar as practicable. 2. Ceiling grid that directly supports lay -in type lighting fixtures shall be secured to structure above by 4 wire hangers, one located within 3" of each comer of the fixture. D. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09510 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 and at penetrations. 3.03 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC ZONES A. Installation requirements for Seismic Zones D, E, F and seismic zone C if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. Each main runner and cross runner shall be supported by a hanger wire located not more than 8" from the perimeter of each ceiling. 2. Main runners and cross runners shall be pop -riveted to wall angles on two adjacent walls of each space, but not on opposite walls. 3. Main runners and cross runners shall be separated by a horizontal spacer bar on two walls opposite those specified in Subparagraph 2 above. Locate spacer bars 8" maximum from perimeter of each ceiling. 4. The requirements specified in Subparagraphs 1 through 3 above apply to all ceilings regardless of size. 5. Each 12 feet square section of ceiling or portion thereof, shall have 4 hanger wires splayed at a 45 -degree angle to the ceiling at a 90 -degree angle from each other, and secured to the structure above. Intersection of splayed wires secured ta'the grid shall begin in one comer of the room or space 6'-0' from each -Wall, and then 12'-0" o.c. in each direction The termination of each wire secured to the grid shall occur within 2" of the intersection of main runners with cross runners. 6. At the intersection of the splayed wires specified in Subparagraph 5 above, a seismic strut shall be attached vertically from main runner to the structure above. Provide bridging welded between joists if necessary for anchoring top of seismic strut. B. The seismic installation requirements specified above shall apply to all ceilings 144 SF and larger in size. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hanger lengths if necessary to correct deflections caused by installation of panels, light fixtures, and other equipment in plenum following original leveling of grid system. B. Clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. C. Remove work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, and replace at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09510 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Resilient Flooring as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Vinyl tile. 2. Vinyl base. 3. Accessories. 4. Leveling/patching compound, adhesives, and wax. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete, for subfloor finishes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. b. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having Jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Manufacturer Provide type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with labels indicating brand names, colors and pattems, and quality designations legible and intact. B. Protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. Store materials at the Project site within the building and in a dry place at least 24 hours before installing flooring materials. Space temperature shall not be Less than 70 degrees F nor more than 90 degrees F. RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. Spaces to receive resilient flooring materials shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F.; this temperature shall be maintained during the installation of the flooring, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. 2. When solvent -based adhesives are used, the space shall be ventilated; use spark proof fans if natural ventilation is inadequate. Prohibit smoking. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. NO SUBSTITUTIONS are allowed on this Project, unless so specified. 2.02 MATERIALS A Vinyl Composition Tile: ARMSTRONG World industries, Inc. http://www.armstrong.com/commflaoringna/product details.jso?item_id=384 tr 1. 12" x 12' x 118" vinyl tile complying with ASTM F1066, Composition 1, Class 2, Excelon Tile Series, "Imperial Texture" pattern. Colors as shown on Drawings. B. Resilient Base: JOHNSONITE, Inc. htto://www.johnsonite.com/products/default.htm 1. 1/8" gage, coved set -on type and straight base, 4" high unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Colors as shown on Drawings. a. Coil stock only is allowed, NO 4 ft. lengths. C. Reducer Strips: Vinyl, 1" x thickness required, beveled. Colors: Selected by Owner's representative from the manufacturers standard colors. D. Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. E. Adhesive: Water and alkali resistant, complying with recommendations of resilient flooring manufacturer. F. Wax: Resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended commercial floor wax. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring shall meet the minimum requirements of the manufacturer of the flooring. C. Resilient flooring work shall not be started until all items that go through the flooring have been installed. No resilient flooring shall be installed until the installer has determined that the chemical treatment on substrates will not interfere with the successful application of the flooring materials. D. Before installing resilient flooring, test concrete floors for excessive moisture. Do NOT perform tests until working environment within the room or space is approximately the same as the flooring will encounter when the room or space is enclosed and the air is conditioned. Test floors by one of the following methods, at the installer's option: 1. Test floors by taping a 36" x 36" mat of polyethylene sheet material to floor at edges with duct tape. If darkening of concrete is observed or if condensation is apparent on the underside of the sheet after 24 hours, it is unsafe to install flooring. 2. Test floors'With flooring manufacturer's calcium chloride testing kit. Follow instrtietions included in kit. If moisture results exceed manufacturer's published limits, it is unsafe to install flooring. 3. Perform at least one test for each concrete pour made, which is to receive resilient floor covering, but not Tess than one test for every 500 SF of flooring to be covered. E. Verify that finishes of sub floors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete, for slabs receiving resilient flooring. F. Spaces in which resilient flooring is being installed shall be closed to traffic and other work. G. Before installing resilient flooring, fill cracks and holes and level depressions with underlayment compound. Surfaces shall not vary more than 3/16" in 10 Ft. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install resilient flooring in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and printed installations instructions, unless otherwise specified. B. Mix and apply adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Cover surface evenly. Maximum working area shall not be exceeded. Install flooring within time limits recommended. If adhesive films over, or dries, remove the adhesive and recoat the area. RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Lay flooring so that fields or patterns center on areas. Adjust pattern so that edge pieces shall not be Tess than one half tile (vinyl composition tile). Lay flooring true to line, level, and with tight joints. Roll flooring to assure intimate contact and proper adhesion to substrate. D. Cut flooring to and around all permanent cabinets and bases. E. Firmly adhere resilient base to walls and permanent bases. Use longest lengths practical. Form internal and external corners and end stops with preformed units. Comers may be hand formed if method is demonstrated and approved. Mitered comers shall not be used. Scribe bases accurately to abutting surfaces. F. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular vertical substrates, fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler. G. Remove excessive adhesive in accordance with flooring manufacturers instructions. H. Install reducer strips at terminations of resilient tile flooring where substrate is exposed and extends beyond. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Not Tess than 4 days after flooring installation clean the resilient flooring and base. Wash thoroughly,`vvith a cleaner recommended by the flooring manufacturer, in accordanavciith flooring manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09650 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09660 LAMINATED FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Laminated Flooring as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. include without limitation: 1. Cushion. 2. Accessories. 3. Vapor barrier. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete, for subfloor finishes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standardt: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. b. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. B. Performance Compliance: 1. ASTM E662, Smoke Density, Flaming and non -flaming * 450. 2. ASTM C1028, Slip Resistance: Wet and dry: 10.8. a. ADA Mark 1 Protocol: µ / 0.8. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. D. Manufacturer. Provide type of laminated flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. E. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be licensed by or approved in writing by the laminated flooring manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01300 for requirements. LAMINATED FLOORING Section 09660 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's printed instructions for handling, storage, installation, protection, and maintenance. C. Installer qualifications. D. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01700 for requirements. 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain re[atiive humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between 65° F and 75° F in spaces to receive flooring for 48 hours prior to and during installation. After installation, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. B. Install decorative laminate flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. C. Do not install or use this product at temperatures less than 55° F or greater than 100° F. D. Do not install or use this product where humidity is routinely less than 25% or greater than 60%. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of ten (10) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.08 REPLACEMENT MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed, packaged with protective covering, and with manufacturer's labels describing contents. 1. Decorative Laminate: Equal to 1% of amount installed for each pattern and color indicated. LAMINATED FLOORING Section 09660 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2. Laminate and Vinyl Trim: Minimum 12 lineal feet of each vinyl profile used. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Specified Manufacturer All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Wilsonart Flooring, a Division of Wilsonart Intemational, Inc., (800) 435-9109 www.wilsonartflooring cam 2. No Substitutions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Description: 1. Commercial floating floor system consisting of laminate planks with Wilsonart Tap-N-LockTM mechanically interlocking profile glued together and installed over Wilsonart Commercial Cushion. B. Laminate Flooring: f 1. Estate Plus W3000166 "Arrow Chem', as manufactured by Wilsonart. a. Planks: 7.70 inches wide by 46.45 inches long x 0.330 inch thick (196mm x 1180mm x 8.4 mm). C. Wilsonart Commercial Cushion: 1. Black Polyethylene foam with black polyethylene moisture barrier filled with sound absorbing molecules and fortified with antimicrobial agent. D. Accessories, as manufactured or recommended by Wilsonart: 1. Adhesive: Premixed, water-based adhesive. Use to glue planks and seal cut edges of flooring planks. a. Wilsonart "Blue Fusion' adhesive. 2. Flooring Spacers: Maintain spacing between flooring and walls or other perimeter vertical surfaces. 3. Silicone Sealant Seal gaps, around metal door frames and flooring edges and in areas where moisture is present 4. Molding Trim, provide as applicable: a. Base Board: Trim around wall base (laminate wrapped). b. Quarter -Round: Covers gap at walls and other fixed vertical surfaces LAMINATED FLOORING Section 09660 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 (laminate wrapped). c. Step Down Nosing: Finish flooring edge at the top of stairs or step down rooms (aluminum). d. End Cap: Trim at exterior doorways to finish space at end of laminate flooring (aluminum). e. One Step: Complete stair tread including nosing for contained (boxed) stairways (laminate wrapped). f. T -Expansion: Used En doorways or thresholds to join two areas of laminate flooring (aluminum). g. Transition Strip: Used to join laminate flooring to other flooring materials of varying heights (aluminum). C. Vapor Baffler. Provide vapor barrier (retarder) over concrete and cement based subfloors. 1. ASTM E1745, Class A or B, sheet membrane material, not Tess than 10 mils thick. Provide one of the following: b. Maistop Ultra 10, by Fortiflber, (800) 773-4777. c. Perminator 10 mil, by W.R. Meadows, (800) 342-5976. d. Vapor Block 10 mil, by Raven Industries, (800) 635-3456. 2. Tape and Adhesive: Tape and adhesives for sealing laps, punctures, tears and penetrations shall be pressure -sensitive, waterproof adhesive tape, compatible with retarder, 2 inches minimum width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Verify concrete slabs are dry according to ASTM F 1869 with maximum moisture emission rate of 5 pounds per 1000 SF per 24 hours. Do not install flooring with high alkaline content. D. Concrete slabs: Grind high spots and fill low spots to provide a maximum 3/16 -inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 -foot straight edge. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install laminated flooring in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, in locations shown on Drawings. LAMINATED FLOORING Section 09660 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc, —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches as required. Replace damaged work as directed by Owners representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION LAMINATED FLOORING Section 09660 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Install Owner furnished Carpet as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. B. Contractor shall provide materials as listed below, including without limitation: 1. Accessories. 2. Adhesives. 3. Underiayment and patching compounds. 4. Miscellaneous materials as required for a complete installation. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Industry standards goveming this work except as otherwise noted. 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. -T = ASTM E648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 2. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI): a. CRI 104, Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. 3. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. b. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. B. Adhesives: VOC compliant, Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) "Green Leber listed. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. D. Installer. Engage a carpet installation firm, which has at least 5 years successful experience in carpet installations similar in size and type to the carpeting requirements of this Project. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Owner will deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping. Unload and store carpet inside, In well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. Inspect materials upon delivery. Damaged and otherwise unsuitable materials, when so determined, shall be reported to the Owner upon delivery. CARPETING Section 09680 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet (Owner Furnished): For the purpose of bidding, the carpet will be direct glue type. 1. Manufacturer. Karastan Bigelow Commercial Carpet, Division of Fieldcrest Cannon, Inc. 2. Pattern and Color: Refer to Drawings. B. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard, No. 150 by Mercer Products Co. 1. Color Refer to Drawings. C. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, non -staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. 1. Direct Glue Application Adhesive: NuBroadlok Premium Pius adhesive as manufactured by Mohawk Industries, VOC compliant, CRI 'Green Label" listed. tr 2. NeSLJBSTITUTIONS. 3. NO spray -applied adhesives allowed. D. Seaming Cement Seaming adhesive for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. 1. Seaming cement shall be compatible with NuBroadlok Premium Plus carpet adhesive as recommended by Mohawk Industries. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. E. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based formulation provided or approved by carpet manufacturer for applications indicated. F. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturer of carpet, and other carpeting products; and selected by installer to meet project requirements. CARPETING Section 09680 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. 1. Verify that finishes of sub -floors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet. B. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sub -floors shall be level and free of irregularities. Irregularities in the sub -floor height shall be gradually raised with troweled underlayment. B. Prior to installation of carpeting, sub -floors shall be dry, broom clean, free of oil, grease, paint, or concrete treatment that may interfere with adhesion of carpeting. C. Measure each space to receive carpeting, as a basis of cutting and seaming the carpet. Do not scaletthe Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions shown. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpeting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Carpeting shall run under open bottom items such as heating convectors, and shall be installed tightly against walls, and bases so that all portions of the floor are covered in each room. C. Carpeting shall be installed around all floor outlets or similar obstructions. Extend carpeting into alcoves and recesses adjoining areas to be carpeted. D. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible to minimize the placement of seams in traffic lanes. Hold cross seams to an absolute minimum. Make all seams so the pile of the adjoining pieces have the same directional run to be practically invisible. E. On completion the carpet shall be free of wrinkles and buckles; seams and cross - joints shall be straight, close and well made. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At the completion of the Work, the protective covering shall be removed, when directed by the Owner. B. Rubbish, wrapping paper, and salvages shall be removed from the Project site. Excess pieces of usable carpet shall be left with the Owner for future repairs. 3.05 PROTECTION CARPETING Section 09680 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 A. Carpeting shall be adequately covered and protected against damage during the remainder of the construction period, and until acceptance by Owner. Protect by means of clean drop cloths, or heavy, reinforced, non -staining paper. Damaged carpeting will be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor. END OF SECTION CARPETING Sect9on 09680 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2005 SECTION 09800 COATING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Coating System as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Coating system' for exterior face of tilt -up concrete wall panels, and other concrete walls above grade. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 03442 - Tilt -Up Wall Panels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Comply with codes,r laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction o3er this part of the work. B. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall be approved by the coating Manufacturer, for this Project only. Applicator shall have 5 years experience in applying specified product(s). C. Pre -application Conference: 1. General Contractor shall schedule a pre -application conference, prior to application of coating system. The meeting shall take place at the Project site. 2. Participants shall include: a. The Applicator. b. General Contractor, project manager and superintendent. c. Masonry/Concrete Subcontractor(s). d. Coating Manufacturer's Representative. e. Kohl's Construction Manager. 2. Provide at least 2 weeks advance notice to participants prior to convening pre - application conference. 3. Review concrete/masonry work. Record discussions and agreements. Fumish copy to each participant. COATING SYSTEMS Section 09800 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 a. Include defects in concrete walls, and recommend remedial work. b. Include meter readings of the moisture content of the concrete/masonry walis. D. Mock -Up: 1. In the presence of the General Contractor, prepare a sample pan& at least 100 feet square of the primer and topcoats, for Coating Manufacturer representative's and Kohl's Construction Manager's approval. Review shall be for surface preparation, coverage rates, and uniformity of coating colors, texture, and application. 2. DO NOT proceed with further application: a. Until defects in concrete/masonry walls have been repaired. b. If moisture readings exceed the allowed percentage per manufacturer. c. Until approval of the sample panel has been given by Kohl's Construction Manager. it E. Manufactu?er's local Representative shall inspect and sign -off the completed coating application. Inspection Report and Sign -off documents must accompany Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver, receive and handle coating materials only in unopened, original containers, with labels intact, until the time of application. Record batch or lot numbers of ail coating materials for reference and warranty requirements. S. Store materials on Site in an approved location, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not proceed with application of materials if ambient temperature is below the written recommendations of the manufacturer, and if ice and frost are covering the substrate. 2. Surface temperature readings shall be made on all walls to confirm substrate temperatures and conditions. COATING SYSTEMS Section 09800 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer and Applicator shall provide a joint, signed, material and labor Warranty for a period of five (5) years against water penetration of the film, peeling, efflorescence, blistering, cracking and deterioration of the coating, or any other failure of coating system not specified. 1. Inspection Report and Sign -off documents by the local Manufacturer's Representative must accompany Manufacturer's Warranty. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years, in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Specified Manufacturer AH materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Applicator must contact the following Manufactures Representative for product application information and pricing. 1. Sto Corp. Atlanta, GA http:l/www.stocorg,comf See Vendor Contact List on Sheet DS1 for contact information. 4T 2. Textured Coatings of America, Inc. (Texcote) http:l/www,texcote.coml See Vendor Contact List on Sheet DS1 for contact information. 3. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. S. Use only products of one manufacturer throughout. 2.02 MATERIALS A Concrete Tilt -Up Application: 1. Sto Corp.: Multi -coat, water-resistant, above -grade, silicone emulsion coating system (mil thickness per manufacturer's specifications). a. Sto "Hot Prime", spray/back roll (prime to paint ready), (2 coats minimum). (5 mils per coat) b. Sto Silco Lit 1.0, spray applied (140 —165 ft2/ 5 gal pail). 2. Tex -Cote: Multi -coat, water resistant, above grade Acrylic coating system (dry mil thickness per manufacturer's specifications). a. TCA XL -70 primer, spray applied. b. TCA 300 textured coating, spray applied. 3. Tex -Cote Alternate cold weather conditions (35° F and rising) - Consult TCA for specific installation procedures prior to commencing (dry mil thickness per manufacturer's specifications). COATING SYSTEMS Section 09800 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No, 3079 October 12, 2006 a. TCA XL -70 primer, spray applied. b. TCA XL -70* textured coating, spray applied (15-18 dry mil thickness). *TCA XL -70 Tex -Cote may be limited in certain deep tone color ranges. Applicator shall verify at time of bidding. 4, Colors: As shown on Drawings. a. Primer coats and topcoat colors shall be dissimilar colors to ensure proper topcoat coverage. 5. Textures: a. Aggregate Finish (1 mm): For application to Tilt -Up concrete wall panels and cast -in-place concrete walls, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to application, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meetingltoleran`ces or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Pressure wash surfaces to be coated to remove dirt, dust, grease, form release agents, oil, loose particles, laitance, and foreign material, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, and allow to dry thoroughly. Test concrete wall surfaces with calibrated moisture metering equipment daily. 1. Perform tests along the length of each concrete/masonry wall, at or near 4 feet above grade and at or near 16 feet above grade, or more often if necessary to confirm accurate moisture condition of walls. C. Sealants shall be installed after the application of coating system. D. Mask other finished surfaces as required. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Concrete Tilt -Up: 1. Apply primer and textured topcoat system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Mil thickness shall be per manufacturer's specification. Applicator shall be responsible for number of coats necessary to achieve proper thickness. No lap marks are allowed. Completed coating shall be free of all "pin holes," voids or cracks in coating. COATING SYSTEMS Section 09800 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The applicator shall maintain daily accurate records of the masonry coating application and provide copies of records to the Owner's representative and the manufacturer upon completion, as well as to the Contractor's Superintendent at end of each day's work. 1. Records shall include at least the following information: a. Daily temperatures morning and evening. b. Weather conditions. c. Wall area coated daily (specific locations). d. Description of material applied and amount of material used daily. e. Computed coverage rate per square feet. f. Daily moisture readings of surfaces to be coated. 2. Records shall be made available for periodic review at the request of the Owner's representative or the manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING A Upon completion of masonry coating work, remove masking, clean window glass and other surfaces to remove spatters using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 'r END OF SECTION COATING SYSTEMS Section 09800 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Paint work as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Painting interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces shown and otherwise scheduled to be painted. 2. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified in addition to shop priming, and surface treatments specified under other Sections of the Work. 3. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work in paint finished spaces. B. 'Pains" as used herein means coating systems, materials, including but not limited to, primers, emulsions7 bnameis, stains, varnish, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whither used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. C. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work: 1. Shop priming specified in other Sections. 2. Mechanical and electrical work except exposed in painted spaces. 3. Prefinished items. 4. Finished metal surfaces. 5. Operating parts and labels. 6. Copper, brass, bronze, aluminum, stainless steel and other nonferrous metals. 7. Face brick, ceramic tile, structural glazed units, stones, veneers, marble, and other similar items. 8. Work identified as not to be painted. D. Contractor shall contact ICI Paint manufacturer's regional representative prior to ordering paint and paint related materials. 1. Contractor shall fumish a copy of this Section to the ICI Paint manufacture's regional representative for review, prior to ordering. PAINTING Section 09900 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2008 2. The ICI Paint manufacturers representative shall review paint contractors submittals and verify all proposed materials conform to paint schedules as specified herein, and to manufacturer's standards. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 09800 - Coating Systems. 2. Section 09960 - Vinyl Wall Covering. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the recommendations of the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) for Premium Grade work, unless otherwise specified herein. S. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturers best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. 1. Each product container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indicating manufactu?er's name, type of material, product number, batch number, color, and instructions for reducing where applicable. 2. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will NOT be acceptable. D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. E. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, fumish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime as required. Notify the Owners representative, in writing, of anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. F. No claims as to the suitability of materials specified, or the applicator's inability to produce first class finishes with these materials will be considered unless such claims are made in writing prior to the start of the painting work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Receive paint materials only in unopened, original containers with labels intact. Store materials on the site in an approved location. Damaged or otherwise defective material when so determined, shall be removed from the site, and shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. PAINTING Section 09900 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Finishes shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. B. Finishes other than water -thinned coatings shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of surface moisture as determined by sight or touch. C. Finishes shall not be applied when the temperature of the surfaces to be painted and of the surrounding atmosphere is below 50 degrees F, or when the temperature is expected to drop to 32 degrees F. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits during application and drying periods, as specified by the paint manufacturer. 1.06 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty for a period of five (5) years from the date of final approval by Owner. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS / 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. NO SUBSTITUTIONS are allowed. 2. Refer to Drawings for color schedules. B. PAINT Manufacturer, INTERIOR and EXTERIOR Work, General Coatings and Stains: 1. ICI http://www.icipaintstores.com/. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. a. Store finder ittp:/Iwww.icipaintstores.com/storelocator/StoreLocator.jsp C. GFRC Gateway and Canopy Trim: 1. M.A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (MAB) Phone: (800) 622-1899. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide materials, brushes, tools, ladders, scaffolds, and other equipment necessary for the proper execution of each type of work. B. Materials shall be as specified in Paragraph 3.06 - Paint Schedule. C. Materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, and mineral spirits, shall be pure and of highest quality. PAINTING Section 09900 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.03 COLORS A. Prior to beginning work, obtain approval of colors for surfaces to be painted, Each coat of paint shall be slightly lighter or darker than the preceding coat Colors may not necessarily be the manufacturer's standard colors. B. Paint colors shall be as indicated on Drawings. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to match reference draw -downs in all respects. Contractor shall contact the manufacturers for further information prior to bidding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work, which cannot be corrected under "Preparation" requirements specified herein. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerance or quality requirements imposed within Specifications governing substrate prior to initiating this work. B. Field verify that all surfaces are suitably prepared to receive paint (caulked and patched as necessarf), as required by Painting industry standards. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove and protect hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items, before painting. Protect finished surfaces in areas where paint is being applied, with clean drop cloths and suitable masking. 2. Clean surfaces as required to remove oil grease, dust and dirt. Sand where necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive finish. B. Surface Preparation: 1. CONCRETE and MASONRY: Patch and caulk as required. Prepare surfaces by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and buming of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 2. FERROUS METALS: Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized, and not shop coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 3. GALVANIZED METALS: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non - PAINTING Section 09900 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 petroleum based solvent. 4. WOOD: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including interior millwork and trim. b. When transparent finish is required, use spar vamish for backpriming. c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer (pigmented to be easily identifiable) immediately upon delivery to job. 5. GYPSUM WALLBOARD: Fill scratches, nicks and uneven areas with joint compound or spackle, and sand flush with the surface. C. Materials: 1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 2. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean conditions, free of foreign materials and residue. 3. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the Paint Schedule, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items and surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials and areas. If color is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. B. Apply paint evenly and smoothly without runs, sags, brush marks, laps, streaks, unfinished patches and other blemishes. The hiding shall be complete, and each coat shall be so applied to produce fill of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to ensure that all surfaces including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces. C. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. PAINTING Section 09900 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 D. Brush out flow on each coat as required by the characteristics of the materials, or as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Priming coat shall be of suitable type for each surface and compatible in each case with the finish paint. F. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying next coat. G. The priming coat on concrete block shall be tinted to the approximate shade of the final coat. Suction spots or "hot -spots" in concrete, evident after the application of the first coating shall be touched -up before applying the second coat, to produce an even result in the finish coat. H. Properly prepare and touch-up scratches, abrasions and other disfigurements and remove foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. Spot -priming or spot - coating shall be featheredged into adjacent coatings to produce a smooth and level surface. I. Final coats shall not be applied before other trades whose operations would be detrimental to finish painting have Finished with their work in the areas to be painted. J. Fill nail holes with suitable filler. K. Finish recesses the same as adjoining rooms. Finish other surfaces the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces unless otherwise shown. L. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only, before Final installation of equipment. M. Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors. Temporarily remove door silencers from frames prior to painting. Replace door silencers after Finish coats are dried. N. If metal has been shop primed omit first coat, except for touch-up. Primer for touch-up shall be the same composition as shop primer. O. Water Repellent: Apply per manufacturer's printed instructions. P. Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1. Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in occupied spaces. 2. Paint exposed items, identical with room color, ceiling color or adjacent surfaces unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to the following: a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. b. Heat exchangers. c. Tanks. d. Ductwork, insulation. e. Motor, mechanical equipment and supports. PAINTING Section 09900 - 6 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 f. Accessory items. 4. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Switchgear. 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers and grilles, with a flat, non -specular black paint. 6. Paint ail store fixtures FCFFCI and TFFCI where painting is scheduled on the Drawings. Q. Do not paint over code -required labels, such as Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual, and over equipment identification, performance rating, name, and nomenclature plates. 3.04 CAULKING A. Finish caulking shall be done after painting is completed. B. Caulk shall match adjacent paint color. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements, until such requirements are met. B. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and defaced painted surfaces. 1. Costs for this touch-up painting shall be charged to the Contractor, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Notify the Owner's representative immediately upon such discovery. C. During the progress of the work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from the Project site at the end of each workday. D. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, taking care not to scratch and otherwise damage finished surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect work finished under this Section and the work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted surfaces. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. PAINTING Section 09900 - 7 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.07 PAINT SCHEDULE A. EXTERIOR Paint Systems based on ICI Paints for the various substrates as indicated (with the exception of GFRC, exterior Concrete and CMU). 1. Bituminous/Concrete Paving and Curbs: a. 1 coat ICI/Dulux 4900 Series Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint. 2. Ferrous Metal: a. 1 coat primer Devgard 4120. b. 2 coats Devgard 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel. 3. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum: a. 1 coat primer Devgard 4120. b. 2 coats Devgard 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel. 7. E1FS: Acrylic, Flat finish: a.1 coat: Acrylic primer Dulux Professional 2000. b. _f - 2 coats: Acrylic Dulux Professional 2000 Fiat. 8. GFRC Gateway and Canopy Trim: a. 1 coat MAB Lok-Tite Latex Surface Conditioner. b. 2 coats MAB Sea Shore/Four Seasons Semi -Gloss 024 Line Trim Paint. 9. Cast -In -Place Concrete, Tilt -up Concrete Wall Panels and CMU shall be coated as specified in Section 09800. 10. EXTERIOR WOOD: ICI Paints (No Substitutions). Contractor shall contact ICI Paint manufacturer's regional representative for material review and verification prior to ordering paint and paint related materials. a. System Coverage Requirements: 1) 1st Coat: Primer coat, as recommended by manufacturer for specified finish. 2) 2nd Coat and 3rd Coat: Finish coats, per manufacturers specifications. 3) Colors: As shown on Drawings. b. SOLID Finish: 1) One Coat ICI Paints 3210 Gripper Primer. 2) Two Coats: ICI Paints 2600 Woodpride Exterior Aquacrylic Solid Color Stain, c. SEMI-SOLID Finish: PAINTING Section 09900 - 8 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1) One Coat: 1CI Paints 3210 Gripper Primer. 2) Two Coats: ICI Paints Wolman DuraStain Alkyd/Acrylic Blend Semi -Transparent. d. SEMI -TRANSPARENT Finish: 1) One Coat: ICI Paints 3210 Gripper Primer. 2) One Coat: ICI Paints Wolman DuraStain Alkyd/Acrylic Blend Semi -Transparent. 11. EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD: a. 1 coat: Prep & Prime Stain Stomper Solvent -Based Exterior Primer/Sealer 2110-1200 b. 2 coats: Dulux Accents Interior/Exterior Alkyd Semi -Gloss 3106 Series. B. INTERIOR Paint Systems based on ICI Paints for the various substrates as indicated. 1. Ferrous Metals: a. Prime with waterborne metal primer 4020. b. 2 coats Ultra -Hide Latex Eggshell Enamel. 2. Metal Stairs, 9nd Ladders: a. Prime with metal primer Devgard 4120. b. 2 coats Devgard 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel. 3. Metal Railings: c. Prime with metal primer Devgard 4120. d. 2 coats Devgard 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel. 4. Metal Joists and Decking: a. Prime with solventbome metal primer 4160. b. 1 coat Spraymaster DTG Alkyd Flat DryfaII. 5. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum: a. Prime with metal primer Devgard 4120. b. 2 coats Devgard 4308 Alkyd industrial Gloss Enamel. 6. Wood (Clear): a. For stained finish. 1) Stain with soiventbome stain 1700. 2) 1 coat Woodpride sealer (omit on close grain woods). 3) 2 coats Woodpride 1908 Polyurethane Varnish. 7. Wood (Opaque): PAINTING Section 09900 - 9 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 a. Prime with acrylic primer Ultra -Hide 1020. b. 1 coat Ultra Advanced Alkyd 1502 Eggshell Enamel. 8. Gypsum Board: a. Prime with Aquacrylic Gripper 3210 or latex primer 1030. b. 2 coats Ultra -Hide Latex Low Lustre Enamel 1414. 9. Tilt -Up Concrete Wall Panels, CMU: a. Prime with Aquacryllc Gripper 3210. b. Fill block with latex filler 3010 or 4000. c. 2 coats Ultra -Hide Latex Low Lustre Enamel 1414. C. Other Paint Systems: 1. Concrete curbs, ramps, concrete filled metal pan stairs and interior steel stairs: a. 1 coat ICI slip resistant epoxy American Safety AS -250. 1) For terminating treads in each flight of stairs, apply 2" wide safety yellow striping to stair nosing beginning not more than 1" from the face of the riser, for full width of stair tread, including nr landing nosings where applicable. D. Other Surfaces: 1. If substrate is not among those specified above, notify Architect for direction. END OF SECTION PAINTING Section 09900 -10 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 09960 VINYL WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Vinyl Wall Covering as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. Federal Specifications (FS). r 3. Inte?national Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 8 - Interior Finishes. b. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Installer. Firm specializing in wall covering work with not less than 3 years of experience in installing wall coverings similar to those specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Vinyl wall covering shall be stored as packaged by the manufacturer, with manufacturers seals and labels intact Storage area shall be clean and dry and shall be maintained at a temperature above 40 degrees F with normal humidity. Wall covering shall not be stored in an upright position. Remove damaged material from site and replace at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Vinyl wall covering shall be installed only when normal temperature and humidity conditions approximate the same conditions that will exist when building is occupied. Area to receive wall covering shall be at constant temperature of 70 degrees F measured at base elevation. Temperature shall be maintained for 72 hours before, during and 48 hours after the application. VINYL WALL COVERING Section 09960 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Specified Manufacturer All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. RJF International Corp. iittp:/fwww.koroseal.com/vicrtex/vicrtex.html B. Kohl's National Account Decorative Surfaces, 6554 N. Sidney #104, Glendale, WI 53209. Account Representative: Susan Yokum (800) 515-2111. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Arno Vicrtex Custom by RJF international Corp. 1. Vinyl coated fabric, conforming to FS CCC -W -408A (1), Type 11, Medium Duty, Class 2 — Mildew resistant. Colors and patterns as shown on Drawings. 2. Fire Hazard Classification: Wall covering shall bear UL label and marking, per ASTM E84. a. Flame spread: 10. b. Sr?oke developed: 5. B. Adhesives, Primers and Sealers: Wall covering Manufacturer's recommended strippable type adhesive, primer and sealer, to be used on substrates as shown on Drawings. Provide materials that are mildew resistant and non -staining. C. Release Coat: Oil based sealer or enamel undercoater for substrates as shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. Verify all work that penetrates substrate is completed prior to installation of wall covering. C. Remove wall covering from packaging and allow to acclimate to the area of installation 24 hours before installation. D. Remove hardware, wall mounted light fixtures, switchplates, wall plates, and like items from walls before application of wall covering. E. Repair walls as required to provide a smooth, dry, even and sound substrate for wall covering application. F. Prime and seal substrates as recommended in writing by the wall -covering manufacturer, VINYL WALL COVERING Section 09960 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 for each type of substrate involved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use vinyl wall covering rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacturer. Place panels consecutively in exact order they are cut from the roll including tilling spaces above and below windows, doors and similar penetrations. Hang panels by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. B. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing adhesive. Adhesive shall be at room temperature. C. Apply adhesive to back of wall covering using a roller or paste brush to fill pores of fabric and produce a smooth layer and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install seams plumb, and at least 6" away from comers. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Overlap seams and double -cut to assure tight closure. Roll, brush, or use broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall covering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or support. D. Remove excess adhesive immediately, using warn water and a dry sponge, or dry cloth towel. E. The installed wall covering shall be secure, smooth, clean and without wrinkles, gaps and overlaps. Cut edges of wall covering shall be completely concealed. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from wall covering installation and leave areas of work in a neat, clean condition. B. Replace hardware, switchplates, wall plates, surface -mounted fixtures, and like items removed earlier to facilitate wall covering installation. END OF SECTION VINYL WALL COVERING Section 09960 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Metal Toilet Partitions as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Door operating hardware. 2. Coat hooks, bumpers, wall stops, and other items required for a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere includes without limitation: 1. Section 06100 - Carpentry. 2. Section 10820 - Toilet Accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE + 1 A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. b. Chapter 11 — Accessibility. c. Appendix E — Supplementary Accessibility Requirements. B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a standard Warranty. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery and replace damaged or contaminated materials. B. Store materials above ground, under cover, in a dry place, and in a manner to prevent damage or staining. METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10160 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Handle materials to prevent damage to surfaces, edges and ends. Replace damaged materials at no cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Toilet Partitions: METPAR Steel Products Corp. htto://metpar.com 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toilet Compartments: Floor supported overhead braced. View details: http:llwww.metoar.com/Products/Powder Shield/powder shield.html B. Materials: 1. Sheet Steel for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM 8633, Type RS, stretcher leveled, galvanized and bonderized; minimum of 0.00015" thick zinc coating on each faze; minimum gauges as follows: a. Pilasters: 20 gauge. b. Doors and Panels: 22 gauge. c. Headrails: 16 gauge. 2. Concealed Reinforcement 14 gauge for tapping, 12 gauge for anchoring devices. 3. Core Construction: Paper honeycomb permanently bonded to metal face sheets. 4. Hardware and Accessories: a. Brackets: Extruded aluminum with satin anodized finish or brass with dull chromium finish. b. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel with satin finish. c. Finishing Devices: Stainless steel with satin garish, or brass with dull chromium finish; 1 -way or spanner head type bolts where exposed. d. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard notched -in top hinge with corrosion proof pintle and nylon bushing, and gravity or spring tension type cam bottom hinge, fully adjustable to bring door to rest in a selected position. e. Latches: Manufacturer's standard slide latch, with rubber bumper on keeper. METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10160 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Protect No. 3079 October 12, 2006 f. Combination Coat Hook/Bumpers, and Wall Stops: 1) Manufacturers standard hook and pin with rubber bumper, dull chrome finish, for each in -swinging stall door. 2) Wall stop with convex resilient inset, similar to Model W307 by Quality Hardware Mfg Co., dull chrome finish; for each out- swinging utswinging stall door. C. Doors: 24" x 58" x 1" thick, in -swinging (Typical). D. Handicapped Stalls: 1. Provide in-swinging/out-swinging doors as shown on Drawings, with a minimum of 32" clear unobstructed passage in full open position. D. Finish shall be baked enamel on clean sheet steel surfaces applied in following coats of manufacturer's standard paint to provide a minimum finish thickness of 1.5 mils on all exposed non -plated surfaces: 1. 1st Coat: Rust -inhibiting baked -on primer. 2. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Synthetic semi -gloss enamel, applied by electrostatic spray process, baked at not Tess than 300 degrees F for not less than 30 minates, same color for both coats. 3. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, color. shall be No. 021 - Black. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate complete at factory, including drilling, tapping and assembly, to the extent possible within delivery limitations. B. Provide concealed metal reinforcement for attachment of brackets, hardware, accessories and anchoring devices, and as required for adequate strength of units. Provide cutouts required for other work as shown. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to Installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10160 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Partitions: Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 112" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. 1. Secure panels to walls with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry and tile joints. 2. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than 2 stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 3. Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices fumished. 4. Secure overhead -brace to each pilaster with not Tess than 2 fasteners. B. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead -brace when doors are in closed position. C. Accessories: Install accessories in accordance with the accessibility requirements of the local Authority having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's printed installations instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and touch up minor scratches as required. Replace damaged work as directed by Owner's representative, at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10160 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Metal Louvers and Vents as shown an Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Accessories as required for a complete job. B. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07910 — Joint Sealers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Metal Louvers and Vents complying with the following: 1. Air Movement and Control Association International Inc. (AMCA): a. AMCA Standard 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. b. AMCA Publication 261 Directory of Licensed Products, current edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM A526 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. b. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. c. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. B. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. C. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to Project site ready to use. Fabricate in largest sections and assemblies as practical. B. Exercise proper care in handling of Work so as not to injure finished surfaces. Protect Work from damage after it is in place. LOUVERS AND VENTS Section 10200 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. --Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials that are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from Project site and replace with acceptable materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1. Prefinished materials masked with factory applied protective film shall be stored protected from the sun's ultraviolet rays until ready for installation. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed Warranty against color fade, chalking and film integrity for a period of twenty (20) years from the date of final approval by Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer. 1. Nystrom Building Products 1701 Madison Street NE Minneapolis, MN 55413-1400 Toll Free Hotline: 800-547-2635 TolkFree Fax: 800-317-8770 Direct Phone: 612-781-7850 Direct Fax: 612-781-1363 E -Mail: info@nystrom.com Internet: _ .nystrom.conti B. Substitutions not allowed. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide required finish. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. C. Galvanized, Bonderized Coating: ASTM A526 galvanized to G90 zinc coating. D. Fastening: Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and zinc -coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation. 2.03 DRAINABLE BLADE LOUVERS A. MODEL LSA2D45 (for louvers 8" or taller in height) 1. Louver Depth: 2 inch 2. Frame Thickness: 0.062 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Type: Drainable blades at 45 degree angle 4. Blade Thickness: 0.062 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 LOUVERS AND VENTS Section 10200 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 5. Blade Spacing: 2.444 inch 6. Performance Requirements: As follows determined by testing 48 inch by 48 inchunits per AMCA 500. a. Free Area: 38 percent b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than .18 inch water gauge at an airflow rate of 1197 FPM free area intake velocity. c. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 ounces per square foot of free area at an airflow rate of 1197 FPM free area velocity. 2.04 BRICK VENTS A. MODEL FL164 (for louvers smaller than 8" in height) 1. Louver Depth: 1 1/2 inch 2. Frame Thickness: 0.125 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 3. Blade Angle: 45 degrees 4. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch extruded aluminum type 6063-T5 5. Blade Spacing: 1" 6. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: 0.196 SF for a 16'x" x 4 3/4" vent. b. Static Pressure Loss: .10 in water gage @ Approx. 1,010 fpm free area velocity. c. , Water Penetration: Not tested. 2.05 LOUVER ACCESSORIES A. Exterior Sill: Provide sill flashing of same material and finish as louvers where indicated on drawings. B. Louver Screens: Provide framed removable screens for exterior louvers. 1. 18 x 16 mesh 0.011 inch diameter aluminum wire insect screen. 2. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Performance: Fabricate as required for optimum performance with respect to water penetration, strength, durability, and appearance. 2. Size: Fabricate louvers in walls to meet dimensions indicated on drawings. 3. Field Measurement Verify size, location, and placement of louvers before fabrication. 4. Shop Assembly: Fabricate to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints, and field assembly of units. 5. Accessories: Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. 6. Vertical mullions: Provide vertical mullions of type and spacing indicated but not farther apart than recommended by manufacturer. 7. Horizontal mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at horizontal joints between louver units except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. LOUVERS AND VENTS Section 10200 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc.—Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 8. Connections: Join frame and blade members to one another by welding, except where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. 9. Spacing: Maintain equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 2.07 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Shop Finishing: Factory finish louvers and accessories as following: 1. Baked enamel finish: AA-C23C42R1x. C. Color: (Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color selection chart). D. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by louver manufacturer. E. Selected color will be submitted for approval using same materials to be used for fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION oar A. Examine the surrounding structure and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. screws where required to protect metal connection. plumb, and at indicated alignment with Provide brass or lead washers fitted to surfaces and to make a weathertight C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. LOUVERS AND VENTS Section 10200 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements. B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss bf, and is compatible with, factory -applied finish coating. END OF SECTION LOUVERS AND VENTS Section 10200 - 5 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Wall and Comer Guards as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Plastic comer guards. 2. Stainless steal comer guards. 3. Fasteners, as required for a complete job. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 06100 - Carpentry. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to' ite in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact]nspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: Al materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Plastic guards: a. Tri -Guards, Inc. http:/(www.tri-guards.coml b. Tubular Specialties Mfg., Inc. http://www.calltsm.com( 2. Stainless steel guards: a. MM Systems Corp. http://www.mmsystemscorp.com/ b. Pawling Corp., Standard -Products Div. Jtttp:l/www.pawling.com/ 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lexan brand high Impact polycarbonate comer guards, 1-1/8" x 1-1/8" wings and 48" or 96" long as required. Color: Clear. 1. 'Tri -Guards" No. TG 4118 or TG 8118, by Tri -Guards, Inc. 2. No. CP -11848L or CP -11696L by Tubular Specialties Mfg., Inc. WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Section 10260 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 6. Stainless steel comer guards Type #304, 16 gauge, 90 -degree profile (unless otherwise shown), 3" x 3" wings (minimum), and 48" or 96" long as required. Finish: No. 4, Satin. 1. No. CG -50, by Pawling Corp. 2. Or approved equivalent by MM Systems Corp. C. Fasteners: 1. Chrome plated screws for clear plastic comer guards. 2. Stainless steel screws for stainless steel comer guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install corner guards per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Install corner guards in longest practicable lengths to eliminate joints. Secure with fasteners specified of adequate length, trough factory, pre -drilled holes. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A Following installation of clear plastic comer guards, hack out screws, remove drywall dust visible through comer guards and reattach. Finished installation shall be free of drywall dust and other foreign matter on the concealed side of comer guards. END OF SECTION WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Section 10260 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 10440 BUILDING SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide interior Building Signage as shown on drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Non -illuminated handicapped accessibility signage. B. Signs Furnished by Kohl's: Refer to paragraph 2.01 of this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. Chapter 10 — Means of Egress. b. / Chapter 11 — Accessibility. c. Appendix E — Supplementary Accessibility Requirements. 3. Federal Specifications (FS). B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS FURNISHED BY KOHL'S A. Contractor shall coordinate with Kohl's Project Manager to receive signs furnished by Kohl's for Contractor's installation. 1. Contractor shall comply with applicable codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction, regarding installation. BUILDING SIGNAGE Section 10440 -1 KOHL's Department Store, inc. Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. '1. H. Toji & Company, 15320 South Broadway Gardena, CA 90248. Telephone: (310) 323-5210 htto://www.4adasigns.com/ 2. Or as selected by Kohl's. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Interior Signage, General. 1. Type: Type MP melamine over phenolic core, or a type recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Copy: Minimum 1" high lettering for signs with copy. Style shall be as selected from manufacturer's standards. 3. Provide finished edges for all signs. B. Colors: 1. Handicapped Accessibility Signage: 9494 White over 15090 Blue background, complying with FS 599b. 2.04. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY SIGNAGE A. Main Entrance Door: "International Symbol of Accessibility" and borders on 12"x 12" square. B. Checkout Stand: "THIS CHECKOUT STAND TO BE OPEN AT ALL TIMES FOR DISABLED CUSTOMERS", international Symbol of Accessibility and border on a square 10" x 10". C. Men: "MEN", "Men symbol" and border on 12" x 12" high triangle. 1. Doorways leading to men's sanitary facilities shall be identified by an equilateral triangle W thick, with edges 12" long and the vertex pointing upward. 2. Symbols shall be centered on the door at a height of 60" and their color and contrast shall be distinctly different from the color and contrast of the door. D. Women: "WOMEN", "Women symbol" and border on 12" diameter circle. 1. Doorways leading to women's sanitary facilities shall be identified by a circle '/." thick and 12" in diameter. 2. Symbols shall be centered on the door at a height of 60" and their color and contrast shall be distinctly different from the color and contrast of the door. BUILDING SIGNAGE Section 10440 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 E. Unisex sanitary facilities shall be identified by a circle W thick, 12" diameter, with a'''A" thick triangle superimposed on the circle and within the 12" diameter. 1. Symbols shall be centered on the door at a height of 60" and their color and contrast shall be distinctly different from the color and contrast of the door. F. Where permanent identification is provided for rooms and spaces, raised letters shall be provided and shall be accompanied by Braille signage. 1. Signage shall be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. 2. Where there is no wall space on the latch side, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall, preferably on the right. 3. Signage shall be mounted at 60" high above the finish floor to the center of the sign. Mounting location shall be determined so that a person may approach within 3" of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to installation,'examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section farlohditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. B. General Contractor shall coordinate in advance with Owner's signage contractor to provide all necessary supports, blocking and other mounting hardware as required by the signage contractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install signage where shown on drawings with fasteners, vinyl foam tape, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Provide silicone adhesive around perimeter. 3.03 CLEANING UP A. During the progress of the work, the premises shall be kept free of debris and waste resulting from the work in this Section. Upon completion, the Contractor shall remove from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner all debris and surplus materials. B. At completion of work, touch up minor damage to adjacent construction and prefinished surfaces to the satisfaction of the Kohl's representative. Replace materials damaged or stained during installation. Protect completed work until final acceptance by Kohl's. END OF SECTION BUILDING SIGNAGE Section 10440 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY AND CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a standard Warranty. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. For Contractor provided items: Bradley Corp. htto:J/www.bradleycoro.com/ NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Refer to Drawings for toilet accessories list and model numbers. B. Custodian laity shelf: No. 9983, combination shelf/broom holder, with rag hooks, by Bradley. C. Owner Furnished Items for Contractor's installation: 1. Refer to Restroom Accessory Legend shown on the Construction Documents. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Steel shall be Stainless Steel type ASTM 302 or 304, satin finish, unless shown otherwise. B. Accessories shall be of matching design and finish. C. Provide blocking, fasteners, bolts, back plates, etc., as required for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10820 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No, 3079 October 12, 2006 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B, Install toilet accessories only to finished surfaces and after contiguous work has been completed. Install accessories at locations and heights indicated, level and plumb. Ail exposed fasteners shall be tamper -proof. Finish of exposed fasteners shall match items secured. D. Install manufacturer's recommended concealed anchor system for grab bars complete with stainless steel screws. E. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting on adjacent finishes. F. Fit flanges of accessories snug to wall surfaces, Provide for caulking in gaps between 90 -degree retum flanges and finish wall surface after accessories are installed. 103 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for proper operation. B. Protect toilet accestories from damage after being installed. Before acceptance by Owner, clan and restore finishes; replace defective parts or units. Remove all packing material and construction debris and leave area broom clean. C. Deliver accessories schedule, keys and parts manual as part of project close-out documents, For Owner's permanent records, provide two (2) sets of the following items of manufacturer's literature: 1. Technical data sheets of each item used for the Project. 2. Service and parts manuals. 3. Name of local representative to be contacted for field service or consultation. END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10820 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Loading Dock Equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified, complete. Include without limitation: 1. Dock seals. 2. Dock bumpers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: For threaded anchor baits for mounting dock bumpers. 2. Section 05700 - Miscellaneous Metals: For curb angles. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' f 1 : A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). B. Comply with codes, laws, ordinances and regulations of focal authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the work. C. Installer Qualifications: Five years minimum experience in installations similar to those specified herein. 1.04 GRADE IDENTIFICATION AND MATERIAL APPROVAL A. Contractor shall submit to Kohl's Project Manager a field survey identifying the actual grade slope at the Loading Dock. B. Where Loading Dock grade slope is over 4% the Contractor shall obtain a written material approval by Kohl's Project Manager, prior to ordering and fabrication. 1.05 PRODUCT DELNERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. Inspect materials upon delivery. 8. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the - manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Section 11160 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GURANTEE A. Provide Manufacturer's signed Warranty for specified items. B. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Dock Bumpers: a. Durable Corp. http://www.durablecorp.com/ b. Pawling Corp., Standard Products Division http:/lwwwpawling.com/ 2. Dock Seals: a. Chalfant Dor-Seals. http://www.chalfantusa.com/ b. Fairborn USA, Inc. http://www.fairbomusa.comf c. Frrmmelt Industries, Inc. httc:/lwww.frommelt.coml d. Kelley Co., Inc. http://www.kelleycompany.com/ e. SERCO Co. http:llwww.sercocompany.com/ f. W.B. McGuire Co., Overhead Door Corp. htto://www.w_bmcguire.com/ 2.02 DOCK BUMPERS A. Description: 1. Stacked dock bumpers for a total depth 10" thick, by Durable Corp. or equal. B. Base Specifications: 1. One piece molded rubber bumpers with pre -drilled countersunk mounting, to accept 3/4" diameter anchor bolts. 2. Size: Refer to Drawings. 3. Where required size exceeds that available in molded rubber, provide alternative bumper construction specified in Paragraph C below. C. Alternative Material: 1. Laminated rubber bumpers with 3/4" diameter supporting rods threaded at one end and steel retaining angles each side of bumpers. 2. Size: Refer to Drawings. LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Section 11160 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 3. Angles shall be welded to supporting rods at one end and closed with threaded rod at the other end. 4. Units shall be welded to curb angle at the top and bolted at the bottom. a. Provide 3/4" x 8" long "J' bolts. 5. Finish (Metal Parts): Factory applied chrome aluminum lead-free enamel. 2.03 DOCK SEALS A. Products: 1. Chalfant Model No. 160. 2. Fairborn Series No. 1000. 3. Frommelt Model No, ATP 791. 4. Kelley Model No. DSS -100. 5. SERCO Model No. 5-600. 6. W.B. McGuire Model No. TS -181. B. Materials: 1. Fabric covered stationary foam pads for forming airtight seal between truck and loading'dock openings at jambs and head. 1: a. Pads: Refer to Drawings for pad depth; shape and length to suit opening and use. 1) Cover Fabric: Blended vinyl or neoprene coated nylon, minimum 22 oz/s.y. 2) Guide Strips: 4" wide coated nylon on jamb pads. 3) Pleated Protectors: Hypalon, min. 40 oz./s.y. a) Wear Exposure: 7" or 8" as standard with the manufacturer. 4) Color. Black. b. Supporting Frame: Kiln -dried, preservative treated, and factory painted wood, with steel mounting hardware. C. Fabrication: 1. Provide tapered side pads and head pad for firm parallel compression of dock sea! with semi -trailer at inclined and declined docks. 2. Field verify required taper and angle. On grades over 4% a tapered seal shall be required. LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Section 11160 - 3 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. install loading dock equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as specified herein, B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to structure to comply with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, position relative to top of platform, and anchorage. C. Dock Seals: Securely attach supporting frames to building structure in proper relationship to openings and dock bumpers, to ensure effective compression of dock seals when trucks are positioned against dock bumpers. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock equipment. B. After installation, restore marred and abraded surfaces to original condition. END OF SECTION LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Section 11160 - 4 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 SECTION 12690 FLOOR MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide Floor Mats as shown an Drawings and as specified, complete. include without limitation: 1. Roll -up, removable floor mats, recessed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM E648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 2. International Building Code (IBC): a. ' : Chapter 8 - interior Finishes. b. Chapter 12 - Interior Environment. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in good condition, in original unopened packaging, and with labels intact. inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle and store materials to prevent damage or staining, and as recommended by the manufacturer. Replace damaged materials at no additional cost to Owner. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall provide a signed wear Warranty for a period of two (2) years from the date of final approval by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a written Guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified Manufacturers: All materials of each type used in the work shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Sbemco International, Inc. htto://www.sbemco.coml. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. FLOOR MATS Section 12690 -1 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 2.02 FLOOR MAT A. Recessed textile style floor mat: Sbemco "Ultra -Dry". 1. Material: Solution dyed polycropylene fiber with non -slip backing. a. Overall Height: 9/16". b. Color: Charcoal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install floor mats in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and as specified herein. 1. install matt with ribs parallel with front of store. 1 2. Install mats butted to adjacent porcelain tile. 3. Install mats when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operations including painting and decorating are complete. 4. Do not glue down. END OF SECTION FLOOR MATS Section 12690 - 2 KOHL's Department Store, Inc. —Tukwila, WA Project No. 3079 October 12, 2006 APPENDIX I GEOTECHNICAL DATA REPORT GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. 13256 Northeast 20th Street, Suitt 16 Bellevue, Washington 98905 (425) 747-5618 FAX (425) 747-8561 June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Wig Properties 4811 —134th Place Southeast Bellevue, Washington 98006 Attention: M.K Wig Subject: Transmittal Letter— Geotechnical Engineering Study Proposed Kohl's Department Store 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Dear Mr. Wig: We are pleased to present this geotechnical engineering report for the proposed Kohl's department store to be constructed 17200 Southcenter Parkway In Tukwila. The scope of our services consisted of reviewing existingsubsurface Information and conducting additional subsurface explorations, and then developing this report to provide recommendations for general earthwork and design criteria for foundations, retaining walls, and pavements. This work was authorized by your acceptance of our proposal dated April 25, 2006. The attached report contains a discussion of the study and our recommendations. Please contact us if there am any questions regarding this report, or for further assistance during the design and construction phases of this project. cc: Leshya Wig vie email ZJM/MRM: jyb Respectfully submitted, GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Marc R. McGinnis, P.E. Principal GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY Proposed Kohl's Department Store 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington This report presents the findings and recommendations of our geotechnicai engineering study for the site of the proposed Kohl's shopping center to be constructed in the northeast corner of the property at 17200 Southcenter Parkway in Tukwila. Development of the property is in the planning stages at this time. We were provided with potential preliminary site plans prepared by Freiheit & Ho Architects. Based on this information, and our discussions with Wig Properties, we anticipate that a one-story Kohl's department store and associated paved parking/drive areas will be constructed in the northeast corner of the subject property. Specific information regarding the building's construction and anticipated foundation loads is contained in the Geotechnical Services section of the April 2005 Design Criteria manual published for Kohl's Department Stores. This document indicates that the building will have one floor, with an internal mezzanine. The structure is to be either concrete tilt -up or masonry (CMU) construction. The following tvnical design foundation and slab loads (combined dead and live loads) are indicated in the Design Criteria: Main Building Area: • Wail Loads — 3.700 pounds per lineal foot (plf) • Colc2iiin Loads — 85 kips Floor Loads —175 pounds per square foot (psf) Mezzanine Areas: • Wall Loads — 7,000 plf • Column Loads --165 kips • Floor Loads — 210 psf The finish floor elevation for the building is to be approximately 26.5 feet. in order to reach this floor elevation, and the surrounding final site grades, fills of one foot to almost 4 feet will be placed above the existing grades, The area between the building and the north and east property boundaries will be filled to create paved areas for parking, and truck drive lanes and load/unload areas. If the scope of the project changes significantiyy from what we have described above, we should be provided with revised plans as soon as possible In order to determine if modifications to the recommendations and conclusions of this report are warranted. SITE CONDITIONS SURFACE The Vicinity Map, Plate 1, illustrates the general location of the site, located south of the Southcenter Shopping Mall. The majority of the planned building footprint lies within an overgrown, undeveloped area on the eastern side of the original J.C. Penney Distribution Center property. This area is covered with brush, and small deciduous trees. The westemmost edge of the proposed footprint is currently covered by asphalt pavement. To the west of the planned building, GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 2 the northern one-third of the future Kohl's parking lot is currently covered by asphalt and concrete that served as the truck staging and loading dock area for the now -vacant J.C. Penney warehouse building, which covers the southern approximately two-thirds of the Kohl's parking area. Based on the topographic survey provided to us, the finish floor elevation of the J.C. Penney building is approximately 27 feet. The southern one-half of the Kohl's building footprint is at an elevation of 25 to 26 feet. The ground surface on the remainder of the Kohl's parcel is currently at an elevation of 22 to 23 feet. The majority of the nearby buildings are one- and two-story warehouse or retail structures. From our previous experience in the area, we are aware that most of these structures are supported an conventional foundations. Deep foundations, such as augercast piers or driven piles, have only been used for the larger, more settlement -sensitive buildings in the Westfield Shopping Center to the north of the site. We observed the condition of the existing J.C. Penney warehouse building and the Bon. -Macy's warehouse building to the north of the site. Both of these buildings are 30 years old, and it appears from a visual examination that these buildings' foundations are in relatively good shape. Some settlement has occurred, as evidenced by cracks in the floor slab and minor cracks between tilt -up wall panels, and there is at least one case where there has been a small amount of spelling at the panel connections due to settlement or earthquake -induced motion. The site topographic survey indicates that there is 3 to 4 inches of elevation difference in the floor slab between the northeast and north corners. Whether the slab was originally constructed with this elevation difference, or not, or not is not known. However, based on the appearance of the building, this amount of differential settlement may have actually occurred. Such settlement over a distance of 450 feet has been Easily tolerated by a properly constructed tilt -up concrete building. Floor cracks that have daveIoped do not appear to have impeded the use of these buildings. We assume that the former J.C. Penney warehouse area was not preloaded, as Dames & Moore did not recommend in their 1995 report that a proposed addition by preloaded. This addition was to be located in generally the same area as the Kohl's building footprint. Giles Engineering Associates recommended in 1996 that a 4 -foot -high preload be utilized for a new one-story J.C. Penney Home Center that was to have been constructed in front of the existing warehouse building. SUBSURFACE Dames and Moore (now URS Corporation) prepared a study entitled "Report of Geotechnical Investigation, Distribution Center Expansion" dated November 22, 1995. This report was for the vacant parcel east of the J.C. Penney warehouse building. They drilled five test borings to depths ranging from 49 feet to 74 feet for that study. Two of these borings (B-1-95 and B-2-95) were conducted inside the Kohl's building area and the logs of these previous borings are attached to the back of this report in Appendix A. In order to supplement these previous explorations, Geotech Consultants, Inc. drilled eight additional test borings on the Kohl's site on May 16, 2006. Five deeper borings were drilling inside the proposed building area to a depth of 51.5 feet. Three shallower borings were drilled in the parking and truck loading areas outside of the footprint of the existing J.C. Penney warehouse building. it was not possible to drill borings on the southern portion of the future Kohl's parking area, due to the presence of the existing warehouse building. The recent borings were drilled using trailer -mounted and track -mounted, hollow -stem auger drills. Samples were taken at 5 -foot intervals with a standard penetration sampler. This split -spoon sampler, which has a 2 -inch outside diameter, is driven into the soil with a 140 -pound hammer falling 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampler a.given distance is an indication of the soil density or consistency. A geotechnical engineer from our staff observed the drilling process, logged the test borings, and GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JNI 04318-1 Page 3 obtained representative samples of the soil encountered. The Test Boring Logs are attached as Plates 3 through. 15. We were also able to confirm the composition of the building pad fill beneath the J.G. Penney in several shallow test holes that were excavated in holes cut through the floor slab. Soil Conditions In general, all of the previous and current test borings found 5 to 8.5 feet of fill soils consisting of sand silt with some gravel. This is likely glacial tilt fill, and according to the Dames & Moore report, it was placed in the summer of 1965. The upper fill in the area east of the warehouse building was likely placed during the construction of the warehouse building in 1968. It appears that some compaction effort was used when the general fill was placed in 1965, as it is very stiff or medium --dense. Within the footprint of the J.C. Penney building, the fill underlying the concrete floor slab is a medium -dense, gravelly sand that was Imported to the site, and which had obviously been compacted when it was originally placed. Below the fill are alluvial sediments consisting of silts and fine-grained sands typical for the surrounding area. These soils have been deposited by numerous episodes of flooding and the meandering of streams and rivers across the valley floor following recession of the last glaciers. The silts and sandsare loose and fairly devoid of significant organic matter to a depth of about 20 feet? Below this is a zone where the loose silts and sands contain layers of peat. Samples of the peaty soils in our test borings had moisture contents of 98 to 146 percent. This organic -rich zone is about 10 feet thick. Below the organic layer, the explorations found layered loose silts and fine sands. Cleaner, medium -dense sands were observed In most of the borings from a depth of about 40 feet. The deepest borings conducted within the proposed Kohl's property extended to a depth of approximately 50 feet. There was a boring drilled previously by Darnes & Moore to a depth of approximately 74 feet immediately to the south of the proposed Kohl's building. This boring did not encounter dense or glacially -compressed soils before it was terminated. Field Hydrocarbon Testing of Soli Samples As required by the Kohl's Design Criteria manual, we conducted field screening for petroleum hydrocarbons on the soil samples that were retrieved from the recent borings. Using a photoionization detector (PID), we scanned each of the samples for volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that could indicate hydrocarbon contamination. No VOCs were detected by the PID. We also did not observe any visual indications of hydrocarbon contamination (stains, odor, etc.) in any of the retrieved samples. Groundwater Conditions It should be noted that groundwater levels vary seasonally with rainfall and other factors. Groundwater seepage was observed in the borings, and represents the approximate location of the regional water table that lies beneath the entire surrounding river valley. This water table may fluctuate seasonally with rainfall and other factors. The final logs represent our Interpretations of the field logs and laboratory tests. The stratification lines on the logs represent the approximate boundaries between soil types at the exploration GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 4 locations. The actual transition between soil types may be gradual, and subsurface conditions can vary between exploration locations. The Togs provide specific subsurface information only at the locations tested. If a transition in soil type occurred between samples in the borings, the depth of the transition was interpreted. The relative densities and moisture descriptions indicated on the test boring logs are interpretive descriptions based on the conditions observed during drilling. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS GENERAL THIS SECTION CONTAINS A SUMMARY OF OUR STUDY AND FINDINGS FOR THE PURPOSES OF A GENERAL OVERVIEW ONLY MORE SPECIFIC RECOMMENDATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS ARE CONTAINED IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS REPORT. ANY PARTY RELYING ON THIS REPORT SHOULD READ THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT. The site of the Kohl's building is underlain by 5 to 8 feet of moderately -compact fill soils. This fill was placed on top of alluvial sift and fine sand soils that are relatively loose and moderately compressible. A layer of more compressible soil containing peat lenses and inclusions occurs from about 22 to 30 feet below the existing surface in the borings drilled east of the existing warehouse building. This layer was not identified in most of the Dames & Moore borings east of the existing warehouse building. Underlying the soft silts were loose alluvial sands and on the southwest comer of the pad soft silt interbeds were observed to the maximum explored depth. -r: Based on the encountered soil conditions, and our observations of building performance around the site, it is our opinion that the proposed Kohl's building can be supported on a conventional foundation system. The existing fill soils have been in place over 30 years and are relatively thick, and the proposed overall building loads (a combination of floor and overall building structure loads), will not be excessively heavy. Considering the variable elevation of the ground surface within the building area, and the somewhat varying thickness of the existing fill, we recommend that the entire building area be preloaded to an elevation at least 4 feet above the planned slab elevation. This 4 - foot preload would be placed following completion of the structural fill for the building pad. We recommend that the preload fill settlement be monitored (see the Preloadrng Program section of this report). In addition to the preload, the continuous wall footings should contain additional reinforcing to reduce the potential for differential settlement along the length of the walls. The foundation and earthwork recommendations in this report involve some risk that must be assumed by the building owners. The risks involve foundation settlement that should be typical for the for the previous developments in the area. We expect that post -construction foundation settlements, following preloading, will be on the order of one to 2 inches under static building loads. This is more than the one inch maximum indicated in the Design Criteria manual. However, this amount of settlement is typical for previous similar construction in the area, and is certainly tolerable by flexible commercial construction. Preventing this amount of settlement would require the use of deep foundations, which would be extremely costly, as they could easily need to extend in excess of 100 feet below the existing grade. As we have discussed, our recommendations are generally consistent with standard building practice in the area. Maintenance and other corrective measures may be required as the building ages, or after a large earthquake. Given the likelihood of detectable foundation settlement in the conventionally supported buildings, flexible building construction and materials are recommended wherever possible_ Concrete tilt -up construction typically performs quite well in similar conditions, GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 5 as the wall panels tend to span over the softer areas, causing differential movement mostly at the flexible joints between the panels. Concrete masonry (CMU) construction is less forgiving to settlement, more readily showing cracks in the masonry units and mortar from even small amounts of settlement. Providing more frequent control and isolation joints in CMU walls can reduce this cracking, as the differential movement will occur at the joints. Settlement -sensitive finishes, such as brick, stucco, and tile should be avoided, as these materials show cracking most readily. We also recommend that sidewalks and concrete approach aprons be doweled into the perimeter foundations to prevent any downset that could result in a trip hazard as the soils beneath the site settle over time. Reinforcing exterior on -grade slabs and sidewalks with rebar would also be prudent to reduce long-term cracking and differential movement. The site soils within the expected depth of excavation do not have a high corrosive potential and are not susceptible to shrinkage or swelling. As with most sites in the Puget Sound region, no special measures are needed to address corrosion for elements that are founded in or above the existing fill soils. The drainage and/or waterproofing recommendations presented in this report are intended only to prevent active seepage from flowing through concrete wails or slabs. Even in the absence of active seepage into and beneath structures, water vapor can migrate through walls, slabs, and floors from the surrounding soil, and can even be transmitted from slabs and foundation walls due to the concrete curing process. Excessive water vapor trapped within structures can result in a variety of undesirable conditions, including, but not limited to, moisture problems with flooring systems, excessively moist air within occupied areas, and the growth of molds, fungi, and other biological organisms that may be harmful to the health of the building occupants. The designer or architect must consider the potential vapor sources and likely occupant uses, and provide sufficient ventilation, either passive or mechanical, to prevent a build up of excessive water vapor within the planned structure. A significant geotechnical consideration for development of this site is the high silt content of the on-site soils. Based on our observations, and the results of existing laboratory tests, the moisture contents of the on-site soils are variable. These fine-grained, silty soils are very sensitive to moisture, which makes them impossible to adequately compact when they have moisture contents even 2 to 3 percent above or below their optimum moisture content. The reuse of the upper existing fill solos as structural fill to level the site will only be successful when weather conditions are such that the moisture contents can be adjusted. Aeration or controlled wetting of soils is usually only possible during the warmer and drier late summer and early fall months. The earthwork contractor must be prepared to rework areas that do not achieve proper compaction due to improper moisture content. Utility trench backfill in structural areas, such as pavements, must be placed as structural fill. improper compaction of backfill in utility trenches and around control structures is a common reason for pavement distress and failures. The alluvial silt and silty sand that underlies the existing fill would not be suitable for reuse in any structural areas on the site. Imported granular fill will be needed wherever it is not possible to dry the wetter on-site soils sufficiently before compaction. Geotech Consultants, Inc. should be allowed to review the final development plans to verify that the recommendations presented in this report are adequately addressed in the design. Such a plan review would be additional work beyond the current scope of work for this study, and it may include revisions to our recommendations to accommodate site, development, and geotechnical constraints that become more evident during the review process. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properfies June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 6 We recommend including this report, in its entirety, in the project contract documents. This report should also be provided to any future property owners so they will be aware of our findings and recommendations. SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS Under the 2003 International Building Code (IBC), the soil profile would be Class E. The saturated alluvial soils have a moderate potential for seismic liquefaction, which is a partial or total loss of soil bearing strength due to high porewater pressures during strong ground shaking. However, the presence of 8 to 10 feet of compacted fill beneath the building will prevent localized bearing loss under the foundations, and should minimize area -wide liquefaction beneath the structure. Dames & Moore concluded in their previous study of the site that seismic liquefaction could occur in the alluvial soils under a magnitude 7.5 earthquake, and that about 3 inches of seismic settlement could occur. They further stated that their calculations indicated that there would be no significant surface effects from a magnitude 6.5 earthquake that resulted in 0.2g acceleration. Due to the uncertainties in predicting the potential effects of seismic liquefaction on commercial structures in the Tukwila and Kent Valley, we recommend that perimeter foundations be continuous and be reinforced with additional rebar. This will allow the exterior footings to span across any areas of concentrated liquefaction (sand boils). The potential for a sand boil to occur beneath, or near, an interior spread footing where the ground surface is constrained by underslab fill and the slab itself is low. The floor siabl rshouid be tied to perimeter and interior foundations. Considering the recommendations presented in this geotechnical report, it is our professional opinion that the differential foundation settlement that could be experienced by the structure during a large earthquake should be on the order of 3 to 4 inches in a distance of 100 feet. It is our opinion that no additional liquefaction mitigation measures need to be incorporated into the structure beyond what are recommended in this geotechnical report. By preventing catastrophic settlement of the foundations, the safety of the occupants should be protected. The intent of our recommendations is not to prevent damage or ensure continued function of the structure after the design seismic event. PRELOADING PROGRAM As discussed in the General section of this report, we recommend preioading the building pad once it has been completed to the design subgrade elevation. This preload is intended to induce some pre -construction consolidation into the underlying soils, and to reduce differential settlement between areas of newly placed pad fill and the thicker fill that has been in place for 30 years. Before placing the surcharge (preload) fill, structural fill should be placed to the design finish grade in the areas to be preloaded. Then a surcharge fill should be added to provide additional preload to induce as much settlement as possible prior to building construction. The surcharge fill does not have to meet any specific requirements, except that it should have a minimum in-place total density of 120 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). However, if the surcharge fill is to be used later as fill on another part of the site, it is important that the material used for the preload meets the requirements for structural fill, i.e. contain no organic sand and be compactable. Also, the potential weather conditions at the time of fill placement should be considered in the material selection, as structural fill placed in wet weather should be coarse-grained and contain no more than 5 percent fines passing the No. 200 sieve. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, rNC. Wig Properties June 20, 200E JN 04318--1 Page 7 The side slopes of the surcharge fill should be inclined no steeper than 1:1 (Horizontal:Vertical), and the top of the surcharge should extend at least 5 feet beyond the building perimeter. No fill berms for landscaping purposes should be placed near the building, since the later addition of any fill could induce further settlement. Prior to placement of any fill, we recommend installing at least five settlement markers in the preloaded area prior to fill placement. Care should be taken to protect these markers from disturbance by construction equipment. The markers should be surveyed by a licensed surveyor prior to, and during, fill and surcharge placement, and then at intervals of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and so forth days after the completion of the fill placement. Initial readings should show the existing ground elevation, and the readings taken during the placement of the surcharge should show the surcharge fill thickness. Settlement readings should be furnished to, and evaluated by, Geotech Consultants, Inc. When the primary settlement is completed, the surcharge fill may be removed. The exposed subgrade should be proof -rolled, and any loose areas should be overexcavated and replaced by structural fill. CONVENTIONAL FOUNDATIONS The proposed building can be supported on conventional continuous and spread footings bearing on the existing site fills where it `can be verified that compaction is at least 95 percent of the maximum density, or on IIew, properly compacted structural fill placed over the existing fill soils. We recommend that for budget considerations that it be assumed that structural fill will be required below all building foundations. See the section entitled General Earthwork and Structural Fill for recommendations regarding the placement and compaction of structural fill beneath structures. Adequate compaction of structural fill should be verified with frequent density testing during fill placement. Prior to placing structural fill beneath foundations, the exposed subgrade soils should be observed by the geotechnical engineer of record to document that adequate bearing soils have been exposed. We recommend that continuous and individual spread footings have minimum widths of 16 and 24 inches, respectively. Footings should also be bottomed at least 18 inches below the lowest adjacent finish ground surface. The local building codes should be reviewed to determine if different footing widths or embedment depths are required. The structural fill below foundations must be at least as wide at the bottom as the sum of the depth of the overexcavation and the footing width. For example, an overexcavation extending 2 feet below the bottom of a 2 -foot -wide footing must be at least 4 feet wide at the base of the excavation. We recommend that the perimeter foundations be reinforced sufficiently to theoretically be able to span a distance of 10 feet without soil support. This typically involves simply adding more horizontal rebar in the footing and stern wall to create a more rigid foundation. An allowable bearing pressure of up to 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf) Is appropriate for footings supported on properly - compacted structural fill. A one-third increase in this maximum design bearing pressure may be used when considering short-term wind or seismic Toads. For the above design criteria, it is anticipated that the total post -construction static settlement of footings founded after preloading will be about 1 to 2 inches, with differential settlements on the order of 1 inch in a distance of 100 feet along a continuous footing with a uniform load. Most of this settlement will be the result of slow, Tong -term consolidation of the underlying alluvial soils. GECMSCH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 8 Lateral loads due to wind or seismic forces may be resisted by friction between the foundation and the bearing soil, or by passive earth pressure acting on the vertical, embedded portions of the foundation. For the latter condition, the foundation must be either poured directly against relatively level, undisturbed soil or be surrounded by level structural fill, We recommend using the following ultimate values for the foundation's resistance to lateral loading: PARAMETER Coefficient of Friction Passive Earth Pressure ULTIMATE VALUE 0.45 300 pcf Where: (1) pcf is pounds per cubic foot, and (11) passive earth pressure is computed using the equivalent fluid density. We recommend maintaining a safety factor of at least 1.5 for the foundation's resistance to lateral loading, when using the above ultimate values. PERMANENT FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS rtr it is unlikely that there will be tall retaining walls on this project. However, walls backfilled ort only one side should be designed to resist the lateral earth pressures imposed by the soil they retain. The following recommended parameters are for walls that restrain level backfill: PARAMETER Active Earth Pressure * Passive Earth Pressure Coefficient of Friction Soil Unit Weight VALUE 35 pcf 300 pcf 0.45 125 pcf Where: (1) pcf is pounds per cubic foot, and (ii) active and passive earth pressures are computart using the equivalent fluid pressures. *For a restrained wail that cannot deflect at least 0.002 times Its height, a uniform lateral pressure equal to 10 psf times the height of the wall should be added to the above active equivalent fluid pressure. The values given above are to be used to design permanent foundation and retaining walls only. The values for friction and passive resistance are ultimate values and do not include a safety factor. We recommend a safety factor of at least 1.5 far overturning and sliding, when using the above values to design the walls. Restrained wall sail parameters should be utilized for a distance of 1.5 times the wail height from corners or bends in the walls. This is intended to reduce the amount of cracking that can occur where a wall is restrained by a comer. GEOTEC#-h CONSULTANTS, INC_ Wig Properties June 20, 2008 JN 04318.1 Page 9 The design values given above do not include the effects of any hydrostatic pressures behind the walls and assume that no surcharges, such as those caused by slopes, vehicles, or adjacent foundations will be exerted on the walls. If these conditions exist, those pressures should be added to the above lateral soil pressures. The surcharge due to traffic loads behind a wall can typically be accounted for by adding a uniform pressure equal to 2 feet multiplied by the above active fluid density. Heavy construction equipment should not be operated behind retaining and foundation wails within a distance equal to the height of a wall, unless the walls are designed for the additional lateral pressures resulting from the equipment. The wall design criteria assume that the backfill will be well -compacted in lifts no thicker than 12 inches. The compaction of backfill near the walls should be accomplished with hand -operated equipment to prevent the walls from being overloaded by the higher soil forces that occur during compaction. Retaining Wall Backfill and Waterproofing Backfill placed behind retaining or foundation walls should be coarse, free -draining structural fill containing no organics. This backfill should contain no more than 5 percent silt or clay particles and have no gravel greater Than 4 inches in diameter. The percentage of particles passing the No. 4 sieve should be between 25 and 70 percent. The on-site soils have too high of a silt content to be used for backfill within a 1:1 (Horizontal:Vertical) zone from the base of the wall. The purpose of these -backfill requirements is to ensure that the design criteria for a retaining wall are not exceeded because of a build-up of hydrostatic pressure behind the wall. The top 12 to 18 inches of the bacid-ill should consist of a compacted, relatively Impermeable soil or topsoil, or the surface should be paved. The ground surface must also slope away from backfilled walls to reduce the potential for surface water to percolate into the backfill. The section entitled General Earthwork and Structural Fill contains recommendations regarding the placement and compaction of structural fill behind retaining and foundation walls. The above recommendations are not intended to waterproof below -grade walls, or to prevent the formation of mold, mildew or fungi in interior spaces. Over time, the performance of subsurface drainage systems can degrade, subsurface groundwater flow patterns can change, and utilities can break or develop leaks. Therefore, waterproofing should be provided where future seepage through the walls is not acceptable. This typically includes limiting cold -joints and wall penetrations, and using bentonite products, spray -on liners, or membranes on the outside of the walls. Applying a thin coat of asphalt emulsion to the outside face of a wall is not considered waterproofing, and will only help to reduce moisture generated from water vapor or capillary action from seeping through the concrete. As with any project, adequate ventilation of basement and crawl space areas is important to prevent a build up of water vapor that Is commonly transmitted through concrete walls from the surrounding soil, even when seepage is not present. This is appropriate even when waterproofing is applied to the outside of foundation and retaining walls. The choice of an appropriate waterproofing system depends on the specific site conditions, the intended construction and use for the project, and the expectations of the end user. We recommend that you contact a specialty consultant if detailed recommendations or specifications related to waterproofing design and/or minimizing the potential for infestations of mold and mildew are desired. Waterproofing materials and systems should also be evaluated and installed GEOTECH CONSULTANTS. INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 1© by an experienced contractor familiar with the anticipated construction and subsurface conditions. FLOOR SLABS The building floors may be constructed as slabs -on -grade atop new or existing structural fill compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density for a thickness of at least one foot. As we have found on previous projects, it is very important that fill placed in utility trenches beneath slabs, and around the foundations be properly compacted to avoid localizes slab settlement and cracking. To reduce the potential for cracking and downsets from long-term slab settlement resulting from consolidation of the alluvial soils, we recommend that the slabs be reinforced with No. 4 rebar on 18 -inch centers. The slabs should be tied into perimeter and individual spread foundations. The subgrade soil must be in a firm, non -yielding condition at the time of slab construction or underslab fill placement. Any soft areas encountered should be excavated and replaced with additional select, imported structural fill. We recommend using a subgrade modulus of 150 pounds per cubic inch (pci) for design of on - grade floor slabs. All slabs -on -grade should be underlain by a capillary break or drainage layer consisting of a minimum 4 -inch thicknes4 of coarse, free -draining structural fill with a gradation similar to that discussed in Permanent P6undation and Retaining Wails. As noted by the American Concrete Institute (ACI) in the Guides for Concrete Floor and Slab Structures, proper moisture protection is desirable Immediately below any on -grade slab that will be covered by tile, wood, carpet, impermeable floor coverings, or any moisture -sensitive equipment or products. ACI also notes that vapor retarders, such as 6 -mil plastic sheeting, are typically used. A vapor retarder is defined as a material with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms per square foot (psi) per hour, as determined by ASTM E 96. It is possible that concrete admixtures may meet this specification, although the manufacturers of the admixtures should be consulted. Where plastic sheeting is used under slabs, joints should overlap by at least 6 inches and be sealed with adhesive tape. The sheeting should extend to the foundation wails for maximum vapor protection. If no potential for vapor passage through the slab is desired, a vapor barriershould be used. A vapor barrier, as defined by AC1, is a product with a water transmission rate of 0.00 perms per square foot per hour when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Reinforced membranes having sealed overlaps can meet this requirement. Deletion, improper installation or excessive damage of the vapor barrier/retarder has been the cause of several flooring- and vapor -related problems on past projects we have been associated with. In the recent past, ACI (Section 4.1.5) recommended that a minimum of 4 inches of well -graded compactable granular material, such as a 5/8 inch minus crushed rock pavement base, should be placed over the vapor retarder or barrier for protection of the retarder or barrier and as a "blotter" to aid in the curing of the concrete slab. Sand was not recommended by AC1 for this purpose. However, the use of material over the vapor retarder is controversial as noted in current ACI literature because of the potential that the protection/blotter material can become wet between the time of its placement and the installation of the stab. If the material is wet prior to slab placement, which is always possible in the Puget Sound area, it could cause vapor transmission to occur up through the slab in the future, essentially destroying the purpose of the vapor barrier/retarder. Therefore, if there is a potential that the protection/blotter material will become wet before the slab is installed, ACI now recommends that no protection/blotter material be used. However, AC1 then GEOTECH CONSULTANTS. INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 11 recommends that, because there is a potential for slab cure due to the loss of the blotter material, joint spacing in the slab be reduced, a low shrinkage concrete mixture be used, and "other measures" (steel reinforcing, etc.) be used. ASTM E-1643-98 "Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs" generally agrees with the recent ACI literature. We recommend that the contractor, the project materials engineer, and the owner discuss these issues and review recent ACI literature and ASTM E-1643 for installation guidelines and guidance on the use of the protection/blotter material. Our opinion is that with impervious surfaces that all means should be undertaken to reduce water vapor transmission. It is very important that slab moisture be controlled. We were consultants for a shopping center in Federal Way where there was no groundwater, yet there were significant post -construction moisture problems, which caused considerable expense to resolve. Control and expansion joints should also be used to control cracking from expansion and contraction. Saw cuts or preformed strip joints used to control shrinkage cracking should extend through the upper one-fourth of the slab. The spacing of control or expansion joints depends on the slab shape and the amount of steel placed in it. Reducing the water -to -cement ratio of the concrete and curing the concrete, by preventing the evaporation of free water until cement hydration occurs, will also reduce shrinkage cracking. EXCAVATIONS AND SLOPES `` 1 No excavated slopes are anticipated other than for utility trenches. Excavation slopes should not exceed the limits specified in local, state, and national government safety regulations. Temporary cuts to a depth of about 4 feet may be attempted vertically in unsaturated soil, if there are no indications of slope instability. However, vertical cuts should not be made near property boundaries, or existing utilities and structures. Based upon Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296, Part N, the compacted fill soil at the subject site would generally be classified as Type B. Therefore, temporary cut slopes greater than 4 feet in height cannot be excavated at an inclination steeper than 1:1 (Horizontal:Vertica!), extending continuously between the top and the bottom of a cut. Deep utility trenches intersecting alluvial soils or reaching groundwater seepage will require shoring. The above -recommended temporary slope inclination is based on what has been successful at other sites with similar soil conditions. Temporary cuts are those that will remain unsupported for a relatively short duration to allow for the construction of foundations, retaining walls, or utilities. It is possible that variations in soil and groundwater conditions will require modifications to inclination at which temporary slopes can stand. It is also important that surface water be directed away from temporary slope cuts. The cut slopes should also be backfilled or retained as soon as possible to reduce the potential for instability. Please note that loose soil can cave suddenly and without waming. Excavation, foundation, and utility contractors should be made especially aware of this potential danger. These recommendations may need to be modified if the area near the potential cuts has been disturbed in the past by utility Installation, or if settlement -sensitive utilities are located nearby. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS. INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS JN 04318-1 Page 12 Foundation drains should be used where (1) crawl spaces or basements will be below the structure, (2) a slab is below the outside grade, or (3) the outside grade does not slope downward from a building. A drain on the outside of the foundation must be installed where there are truck wells to collect drainage flowing under the granular fill below the pavement. Drains should also be placed at the base of all earth -retaining walls. These drains should be surrounded by at least 6 inches of 1 -inch -minus, washed rock and then wrapped in non -woven, geotextile filter fabric (Mirafi 140N, Supac 4NP, or similar material). At its highest point, a perforated pipe invert should be at least 6 inches below the bottom of a slab floor, and it should be sloped for drainage. All roof and surface water drains must be kept separate from the foundation drain system. For the best long-term performance, perforated PVC pipe is recommended for all subsurface drains. A typical footing drain detail is included as Plate 16. If the structure includes an elevator, it may be necessary to provide special drainage or waterproofing measures for the elevator pit. If no seepage into the elevator pit is acceptable, it will be necessary to provide a footing drain and free -draining wail backfill, and the walls should be waterproofed. If the footing drain will be too low to connect to the storm drainage system, then it will likely be necessary to install a pumped sump to discharge the collected water. Alternatively, the elevator pit could be designed to be entirely waterproof; this would include designing the pit structure to resist hydrostatic uplift pressures. Water should not be aliovaed to sand in any area where foundations, slabs, or pavements, are to be constructed. Final site grading in areas adjacent to the building should slope away at least 2 percent, except where the area is paved. Surface drains should be provided where necessary to prevent ponding of water behind foundation or retaining walls. PAVEMENT AREAS The pavement section may be supported on structural fill compacted to a 95 percent density. Because the existing near -surface site soils are silty and moisture sensitive, we recommend that the pavement subgrade in areas of new pavement consist of at least 6 inches of well -graded, coarse-grained gravelly sand or crushed structural fill below the pavement section in lightly -loaded pavement areas, such as parking areas, and 12 inches in areas that will receive truck traffic. Crushed concrete can be used for this purpose. Additional granular structural fill or geotextiie fabric may be needed to stabilize soft, wet, or unstable areas. To evaluate pavement subgrade strength, we recommend that a proof roll be completed with a loaded dump truck immediately before paving. The subgrade should be evaluated by Geotech Consultants, Inc., after the site is stripped and cut to grade. Recommendations for the compaction of structural tilt beneath pavements are given in the section entitled General Earthwork and Structural Fill. The performance of site pavements is directly related to the strength and stability of the underlying subgrade. We completed a pavement design for the project using the two loading conditions contained in Section B of the Geotechnical Services portion of the Design Criteria manual. Based on this design, which was completed using the AASHTO Guide, we recommend that the pavement for lightly -loaded traffic and parking areas consist of at least 2 inches of asphalt concrete (AC) over 4 inches of crushed rock base (CRB) or 3 inches of asphalt -treated base (ATB). We recommend providing heavily loaded areas subjected to truck traffic with at least 4 inches of AC over 4 inches of CRB or 3 inches of ATB. Main drive lanes between the parking spots may not carry heavy truck traffic, but are subjected to loads from tuming vehicles, which can do more long-term damage to GEOTECH CONSULTANTS. INC. Wig Properties .tune 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 13 pavement sections, Long-term performance of the pavements in the drive lanes would be improved by using a pavement section of 3 inches of AC over 4 inches of CRB or 3 Inches of ATB. These pavement sections are to be placed over the above -recommended thicknesses of imported structural fill The pavement section recommendations and guidelines presented in this report are based on pavement design, experience in the area, and what has been successful in similar situations. As with any pavements, some maintenance and repair of limited areas can be expected as the pavement ages. This is especially true in areas that are underlain by compressible alluvial soils that will undergo slow, long-term settlement. To provide for a pavement design without the need for any repair would be uneconomical. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND STRUCTURAL FILL Ail building and pavement areas should be stripped of surface vegetation, topsoil, organic soil, and other deleterious material. It is important that existing foundations be removed before site development. The stripped or removed materials should not be mixed with any materials to be used as structural fill, but they could be used in non-structural areas, such as landscape beds. Structural fill is defined as any fell, including utility backfill, placed under, or close to, a building, behind permanent retaining or foundation wails, or in other areas where the underlying soil needs r to support loads. All structural fin should be placed in horizontal lifts with a moisture content at, or near, the optimum moisture content. The optimum moisture content is that moisture content that results in the greatest compacted dry density. The moisture content of fill is very Important and must be closely controlled during the filling and compaction process. The allowable thickness of the fill lift will depend on the material type selected, the compaction equipment used, and the number of passes made to compact the lift. The loose lift thickness shouldnot exceed 12 inches. We recommend testing the fill as it is placed. If the fill is not sufficiently compacted, it can be recompacted before another lift is placed. This eliminates the need to remove the fill to achieve the required compaction. The following table presents recommended relative compactions for structural fill: ' LOCATION OF FILL ,MINIMUM RELATIVE PLACEMVIENT', COMPACTION Beneath footings, slabs or walkways 95% Filled slopes and behind retaining walls 9o% Beneath pavements 95% for upper 12 inches of subgrade; 9Q% below that level Where: Minimum Relative Compaction Is the ralto, expressed In percentages, of the compacted dry density to the maximum dry density, ea determined In accordance with ASTM That DeeIgnatIon 0155741 {Modified Proctor). Structural fill that will be placed in wet weather should consist of a coarse granular soil with a silt or clay content of no more than 5 percent. The percentage of particles passing the No. 200 sieve should be measured from that portion of soil passing the three -quarter -inch sieve. The General section contains a discussion of considerations related to the potential reuse of on-site soils as GEOTECH CONSULTANTS. INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 14 structural fill. Crushed concrete resulting from demolition of the existing buildings could be reused as structural fill. The gradation and maximum particle size for crushed concrete will depend on its intended use, and should be discussed with the geotechnical engineer of record at the time of demolition and site earthwork. LIMITATIONS The conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of our exploration and assume that the soil and groundwater conditions encountered in the test borings are representative of subsurface conditions on the site. If the subsurface conditions encountered during construction are significantly different from those observed in our explorations, we should be advised at once so that we can review these conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. Unanticipated soil conditions are commonly encountered on construction sites and cannot be fully anticipated by merely taking soil samples in test borings. Subsurface conditions can also vary between exploration locations. Such unexpected conditions frequently require making additional expenditures to attain a properly constructed project. It is recommended that the owner consider providing a contingency fund to accommodate such potential extra costs and risks. This is a standard recommendation for all projects. This report has been prepare for the exclusive use of Wig Properties, LLC, and its representatives, for sp,cific application to this project and site. Our conclusions and recommendations are professional opinions derived in accordance with current standards of practice within the scope of our services and within budget and time constraints. No warranty is expressed or implied. The scope of our services does not include services related to construction safety precautions, and our recommendations are not intended to direct the contractor's methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, except as specifically described •in our report for consideration in design. Our services also do not include assessing or minimizing the potential for biological hazards, such as mold, bacteria, mildew and fungi in either the existing or proposed site development. ADDITIONAL SERVICES In addition to reviewing the final plans, Geotech Consultants, Inc. should be retained to provide geotechnical consultation, testing, and observation services during construction. This is to confirm that subsurface conditions are consistent with those indicated by our exploration, to evaluate whether earthwork and foundation construction activities comply with the general intent of the recommendations presented in this report, and to provide suggestions for design changes in the event subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to the start of construction. However, our work would not include the supervision or direction of the actual work of the contractor and its employees or agents, Also, job and site safety, and dimensional measurements, will be the responsibility of the contractor. During the construction phase, we will provide geotechnical observation and testing services when requested by you or your representatives. We can only document site work that we actually observe. it is still the responsibility of your contractor or on-site construction team to verify that our recommendations are being followed, whether we are present at the site or not. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Wig Properties June 20, 2006 JN 04318-1 Page 15 The following plates are attached to complete this report Plate 1 Vicinity Map Plate 2 Site Exploration Pian Plates 3 -15 Logs of Test Borings by Geotech Consultants, Inc. Plate 16 Typical Footing Drain Detail The following appendices are also attached to this report: Appendix A Logs of Previous Borings Appendix B Results of Proctor, CBR and Resistivity Tests We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. If you have any questions, or if we may be of further service, please do not hesitate to contact us. 1 MRM: jyb s Respectfully submitted, GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. Marc R. McGinnis, P.E. Principal GEOTECII CONSULTANTS. INC. IJOIH ; . sr 'bo. �3 Pi �� u00 — 1 1 Is 3 `11 S U2 I ST s3.1i it Fel LID Mo K i \ ! al. e ` 1KS i 1447H;. 1 .'�I 3 n \ r yy s I / - N i ; ,� xa I s MST _ * 5 1 \\\ n \ \\� 0 • �.LtrJ rtni:4 ,r `i \\ , �.---_,-"' T'yrTc' BIALX RIVER sop - - RIPARiAB FQRESF �' IN FS mai! !� -+y{. V ,��.' SOO Y 4' r' T . r ` 5T 6 5 ` Ii s 1Mx Sr !a4 PL .\0\ rva `Esta -'.'' °�\ 1 LIB s f \W. •rR 41M Q s }r^Sy{� Li `..7St+ rn N iV Ty 31 I 1. 3 ST 1 I � I N-, $14711 IST; _ %k 5. . zvr \\ R`.n '/i' g ,_ PAS• �\\\ 11 151111X 1 �3`JT`13 • �kk +je Si'iH ST . 5T le, s 150TH ST s lye §1 8 �• s \ ; � .. :5J3T 1 ,ri22 � aI' I souk H) _ �' rc sti .;-- s f�^l' I LUIS, +� , 1 e' iaj4k. R SZHo '`" rt iS.� J f, 5r 23, _ `: �t a \ 4 �� / '; ''' s% °a 4t_/ , N, \� 2 =tun . - -'aR�- 131— : _s 518 1100°I\ 5 153RD fn $ITo ,11101ILA ''M. ��% S i 158TH -• ‘ IlAvrli 6137H P.. �� IBIO Eiir`itt qma 4P ♦ ►STLQR;Ll(fER 1tS?i%' i• Kii !HaTTSSY O`� "44,4 µEatt wu "� S 5IZt' • � r P. :'IaTx A ,.; STRANQER BLVD 1 u e:lu1 p 1 ., 271E8TH IRS ,a1 (.,_�[-j�' Isom t' I � m� -_.., sy.Tls/tH sc.: 1 +N 1 u :a ke»R.1 ; 7 K, ,' y.(It.„ in[ >: n •pw.P�d i WO MM. m+�' 'a...mo #1aJHr: ` 31 AA* .26 . _ • :i OS --)Th. 0unen.! . r„ as W 3 L k I 7 N l'�3�9?. NT TION 25 FI7tAEQ5 mos �vm • N CORPORA FS j�vli.){.i MAW Al ST `',i ® yd 1%!Ro__651 S ggre PL_�I .! ei' ._ ' M CORPORA is g ` , � 1 Si • M 13 t)51_R 2)6111 ... _n . ' ST 44......." ' _ TYE. MANY PWS-Jglare yJ,pto. * 11R: .lz D 7 ESJ I ! ,•• l at TSR 3B1R_ aEBrmr n CI "' S UM I Lt00 1 s St I161N Sf ?3'Y T's 17 R' f AORi 3- 'may toa n PX 1787H SSM Crt-uIN'' ` :.. aR1 n k + 'f1►i •.c S TR3 T T1 I i � Fk7LW05 ,,s`Jj! 1 '1 6f 1) :. 1_ k...A.. • 0j1 rellarialle' (Saute: 77omas & Thee Long County Street Guide and meow 2006) VICINITY MAP GEOTECH Ai CONSULTANTS, INC 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job Date: Scale: 1 Plate: 04318-1 J May 2008 Not to Scale I 1 I South 172nd Street •••••�.sr••_••�.•r. s es ••••••mp••r.sem•••••.1 l • ••• B-7 B-6 • • Dedicated Parking• •• For Kohl's i • • 11 • si •• i! 1: • 1 1: • • %r 1 1 .. 1 1 1 1 Existing Building • \3 (To Be Removed) 1 1 i B-1 Proposed Kohl's B -I-95 B-3 0B-4 B-2 B-2-95 .3 B-8 Q B-5 - Approximate boring locations by Geotech Consultants Inc. e. Approximate previous boring locations by Dames and Moore 1l nos anuaW PuZ9 North SITE PLAN 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington [Job 1 Date: I Scale: 1 Plata: 04318-1 May 2006 I Not to Scale 2 5 10 15 20 25 30 3 40 4.0 Qt 5 at. alo 4 4' BORING 1 Description 26.8 Y 27 9 7 7 7 4 31 2 3 5 6 71 FILL Gray, silty SAND, medium- to fine-grained, moist, medium -dense (FILL) Brown, sandy SILT, non -plastic, very moist, medium -dense ML I ..1. .I;�, .1. .I Dark brown, silty SAND, fine- to medium -grained, wet, loose S ;Ih I 1li. Black SAND, medium- to fine-grained, wet, loose - becomes coarse- to medium -grained ' Brown SILT with organics, low plasticity, very moist, medium -stiff • - becomes dark gray, slightly sandy, wet • ML 8 ' ':,17l; Black SAND. medium- to fine-grained. wet medium -dense GEOTECH CONSULTANT'S, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job Na: I Data: 04318-1 I May 2006 Logged by: I Plate: ZIM # 3 41 50 55 ./' o{ ,,y id,` ti,, BORING 1 (Continued) Description 4:i„ 4Z,vsie•icit ii F ME O M MI IMP MI N M MEM ma AM 15 14 Black SAND, medium -to fine-grained, wet, medium -dense * Test boring was terminated at 50 feet on May 16, 2006. i Groundwater seepage was encountered at 11 feet during drilling. 1 ...r BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job No: 1 Date: 'Lagged by: 04318-1 May 2008 ZIM ,Plate: 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 atig,9" At SUS v aio� $� �' BORING 2 Description GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington 1 04318-1 1 May 2006 'Logged ZJM PJate: 5 Brown, silty SAND with gravel, organics, medium- to fine-grained, FILL moist, medium -dense (FILL) 24 1 i„ 1 1 1 Brown, sandy SILT with organics, low plasticity, moist, medium -stiff 1111 1111 111 111 I f 11l1 11 f 1 -becomes wet, soft 3 2 ' 11 Eil 111 111 111 +11 +11 2 1 111 ,1 1111 1111 1111 Black SAND, medium -grained, wet, loose S 4� z- r;: • SP . 4y .•I.e rr f.l.: ''1'' Black, silty SAND, tine -grained, wet, loose SM .III;h SF Black SAND, medium -grained, wet: medium -dense GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington 1 04318-1 1 May 2006 'Logged ZJM PJate: 5 50 A° �° 'Sg4 'P g` 'c°p FM 1- 55^ 17 13 21 BORING 2 (Continued) $C' Description Black SAND, medium -grained, wet, medium -dense -becomes coarser grained, gravelly * Test boring was terminated at 51.5 feet on May 16, 2006. * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 10.5 feet during drilling. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington IJob No: f Date: !Legged by: 1 Plate: 64318-1 I May 2006 ZJM 6 1 71 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 � e N.Q" 5 1e BORING 3 Description 27.8 22 17 16 19 17 7 1� 2 3 6 1 7 Brown, silty SAND with gravel, medium- to fine-grained, moist, medium -dense (FILL) [FILL 1111i 1111[1 151111 11111 11111 111111 11111, 111111 , . Brown with blue -gray, sandy SILT, low plasticity, very moist, medium -slit Dark brown, silty SAND, fine-grained, very moist, medium -dense M: ML; 111111 1111 11111, 11111. ' ;;,,,; 111111 111111 „ 1 111111 r1 " 1) Black SAND with organics, medium- to fine-grained, wet, loose ,tr { 11111 ' 1'1 `' 1 Std! Black, silty SAND, fine-gralned, wet, loose 111111 Stack SAND, coarse- to medium -grained, wet, ioose BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job Nro:pate: ed �!'= Plate: 04318-1 I May 2006 1 ZJM ‘.��� e{ s �` BORING 3 (Continued) + , `.1e41, o�� 4syDescription 9 50 1 101 * Test boring was terminated at 50 feet on May 16, 2006. Black SAND, coarse- to medium -grained, wet, loose Dark brown SILT with organics, medium -plastic, very moist, soft -becomes sandy, no organics * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 12 feet during drilling. r BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington IJobio: I Date: ' ZJM 1 Plate: May 8 BORING 4 Description - ..., - Brown, silty SAND with gravel, medium- to fine-grained, very moist, medium -dense (FILL) FILL 36 - Brown, silty SAND, medium- to fine-grained, very moist – [SP 1 9 2- becomes blue -gray and wet 3 ' Black SAND with occasional silt lenses, medium- to fine-grained, wet, loose – 29.6 — - occasional gravel and organics – - no organics .. – 761 — - becomes finer grained, occasional organics ______.–....___..–._....._._.–...._.–........–.....--...–.—..—..-----....._— GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Joh No: 1 Dale: !Logged bY: & Plat 04318-11 May 2006 1 LIM 1 9 50 O NE 55 A e& BORING 4 (Continued) 010 iccr $0. Description 20 81 11 - becomes coarser, no organics 01 * Test boring was terminated at 51.5 feet on May 16, 2006. * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 9.5 feet during drilling. -t GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job No: Date: jrogged by: I Plate: 04318-1 I May 2008 LIM 10 Jab No: I Date: Logged br 1 Plate: 04318-1 1 May 2006 1 ZJM 1 11 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 BORING 5 Description 19.7 27 7 9 13 2 3 1 5 Brown with gray, silty SAND with gravel and occasional organics, medium- to fine-grained, moist, medium -dense (FILL) FILL Brown, sandy SILT to silty SAND, occasional organics, medium -plastic, v soft - becomes wet ML : • Black SAND, medium -grained, wet, loose +sr" - becomes coarse- to medium -grained Brown, slightly sandy SILT with organics, medium -plastic, very moist, soft ML Black SAND, medium- to fine-grained, wet, medium -dense I SP] BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington ry . et y iO4� BORING 5 (Continued) e ` fee ,6 A 4 5� Description 4 12 8 Of 10 50 10 65— 101 - becomes coarse- to fine-grained -becomes medium- to fine-grained " Test boring was terminated at 51.5 feet on May 16, 2006. * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 12 feet during drilling. r • GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job04318-1 1 DMa$y 2006 pigged Plate: ZJM t2 Q� 0 ab° + �o-4r �c�GS BORING 6 Description ION 5 — 10 - L '{5\- 20 --- 27 20-- 27 FILL Brown, silty SAND with gravel, medium- to fine-grained, very moist, medium -dense (FILL) Brown, silty SAND, medium- to fine-grained, very moist, loose * Test boring was terminated at 15 feet on May 16, 2006. * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 10 feet during drilling. sr BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job No: Date: 04318-1 f May 2006 tagged by: IPlate: Z1M 13 2 4 ,)p ,Q6 ,c‘,, -x do BORING 7 Description r 10 r 15 20- 27.2 30 10 3 Brown, silty SAND with gravel, medium- to fine-grained, moist, dense (FILL) Brown with blue -gray, sandy SILT, non -plastic, very moist, wet, loose 1513'1 Black, slightly silty SAND with organics, fine-grained, wet, loose * Test boring was terminated at 15 feet on May 16, 2006. ' Groundwater seepage was encountered at 10 feet during drilling. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington !JabNo: I0431&1 I May 2006 I ZIM I Logged by: Nate: 14 I 1 10 15 ti 040 ta 4 , coo BORING 8 Description r ""— 50.8 MENEM 20--- 23 11 Brown, silty SAND with gravel, with Fran staining, medium- to fine-grained, moist, medium -dense (ALL) ALL] Brown with blue -gray SILT with organics, low plasticity, very moist, medium -stiff - becomes wet, soft Black SAND, medium- to fine-grained, wet, loose * Test boring was terminated at 15 feet on May 16, 2006. * Groundwater seepage was encountered at 10 feet during drilling. GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC. BORING LOG 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington Job No: I Date,: !Logged by: 1piate: 04318-1 May 2006 ZJM 15 Slope backfill away from foundation. Provide surface drains where necessary. Vapor Retarder/Barrier and Capillary BreaIdDrainage Layer (Refer to Report text) 4" Perforated Hard PVC Pipe (invert at least 6 inches below slab or crawl space. Slope to drain to appropriate outfall. Place holes downward.) NOTES: (1) In crawl spaces, provide an outlet drain to prevent buildup of water that bypasses the perimeter footing drains. (2) Refer to report text for additional drainage, waterproofing, and slab considerations. FOOTING DRAIN DETAIL 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington a co e 5v' t r BORING B-1---95 Surface Elevation: 23.7d Mottled gray andcaddish brawn fine sandy sift (moist) (hard) ow.. Grades to very stiff. Gray alt (wet) (stiff). Grades to very stiff. Bieck fine to mediate sand (wet) (loose). Grades to medium dense. )silt with trace organic material (wet) LOG OF BORING Dames & Moore Job No. 00443-181-016 PLATE A-1 Logged by TSP 11-17-1995 —50 ;r —55 —60 —55 70 BORING B-1-95 (Continued) Grades to medium stiff. Block fine to medium sand (wet) (medium dense). Grades to dense. Boring eampleted at depth of 49 feet en 10/25/95. Ground water level not determined. LOG OF BORING Dames & Moore Job No. 00443-181--016 PLATE A-2 C iV 8 32.6 28.9 29.0 26.3 86 91 90 95 19 1a 13 11 10 17 • 2 3 _ 10 .4. 15 20 25 30 l BORING B-2-95 Surface Elevation: 23.7± UL ray mottled reddish brown fine sandy silt (moist) (very stiff) (fill). ML s AAL Grades to stiff. Gray fine sandy silt (wet) (medium stiff). Block fine to medium sand (wet) (loose). Crudes to medium dense. Croy silt with wood pieces (wet) (soft). LOG OF BORING Dames & Moore Job No. 00443-181-016 PLATE A-3 SUperLOG V 2.0. 3-1991 —50 1. —55 r- --60 —65 70 BORING B-2--95 (Continued) Black fine to medium Bond (wet) (medium dense). Baring completed at depth of 49 feet an 10/25/95. Groundwater encountered at depth of 12 feet. LOG OF BORING Job No. 00443-181-016 Dames & Moore PLATE A-4 APPENDIX B — Results of Proctor, CBR and Resistivity Tests Kohl's Department Store 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington GEOTECH CONSULTANTS, INC, 150 146 140 195 130 110 145 100 00 an. 5% 10% 15% Sox 010 00100 (%) Job Name; GE0TECH•04318•1 Job Number: 1174-0044:10 Baring R: Sample it 1 Depth: Date: 51406 Tested by: 8raydan Sall Descriptor: Brvavn Silty fc sand with acr. gravel (SW MOD (pcf) 122.0 OMC (%) 11.3 100%50er110001, .moi Point 1 2 3 T •3/44 nat. MC Mold + Wet Son 24.15 _ 24.52 24.43 • 14.23 14.23 14.23 • Wet Soli 9.92F 10.29 • • Factor 0.075 0.075 0.075 rWet Density 132.3 137.2 r 136.0 Pan + Wet Soli 838.74 761.88 809.90 1231.70 Pan + Dry Sail 784,21 698.65 748.18 1099.00 Moisture LOSS 52.53 • 81.62 132.7 Pan Tare 221.58 214.15 210.38 • 210.40 Dry 8011 r 562.63 484.5 537.8 •. Moisture Cantenl 9.3% . 11.5% an. 5% 10% 15% Sox 010 00100 (%) Job Name; GE0TECH•04318•1 Job Number: 1174-0044:10 Baring R: Sample it 1 Depth: Date: 51406 Tested by: 8raydan Sall Descriptor: Brvavn Silty fc sand with acr. gravel (SW MOD (pcf) 122.0 OMC (%) 11.3 100%50er110001, .moi Point 1 2 3 4 •3/44 nat. MC Mold + Wet Son 24.15 _ 24.52 24.43 Mold 14.23 14.23 14.23 Wet Soli 9.92F 10.29 10.2 • Factor 0.075 0.075 0.075 rWet Density 132.3 137.2 r 136.0 Pan + Wet Soli 838.74 761.88 809.90 1231.70 Pan + Dry Sail 784,21 698.65 748.18 1099.00 Moisture LOSS 52.53 63.21 81.62 132.7 Pan Tare 221.58 214.15 210.38 210.40 Dry 8011 r 562.63 484.5 537.8 888.6 Moisture Cantenl 9.3% 13.096 11.5% 14.9%6 Dry Density 121.0 121.4 122.0 Corr. Moisture Corr. Dry Density A •-Corrected Yaiues 0Uncorrected Values ASTM D1557 { Gravel Wefight 0.78 Sofa Minus 4ravei 55.11 Total 5011 Weight as.a7 % Gravel 1.4 Gravel Size +3/40 AS1 fir Gravel Correction Ramiro Yrs GEOENGINEER . 5/31/200 Job: Geotech Consultants #04318-1 Job # 1174-004-00 Date: 5-30-06 Boring: B-6 Sample: N/A Depth: 0-5.0' Load -Penetration -'--10 Blows -"-25 Blows --2-56 Blows 1000 900 800 700 w . 600 500 11. 400 1300 rrJ 200 100 1 0 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 Penetration in inches Sample #: No. of Blows Remolded moisture content Dry Density of remold (pcf) % maximum dry density Moisture content after soak Dry Density after soak (pcf) % maximum dry density Swell (% of initial height) Bearing Ratio 422 10 Blows .1" .2" A "Optimum Moisture Content Max Dry Density (pcf) 8 C A { B I C 11.3 11.3 111.4 118.1 11.3 122.9 r 91.3% 1 96.8% 1 100.7% 16.3% 14.3% 12.0% 110.9 118.5 122.1 90.9% 1 95.5% L 100.1% 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 Beartng Ratio © 25 Blar+r►s 11.5 122.0 Bearing Ratio a 55 Blows CBR Dry Density Cod) CBR Dry Density (pet) .1" .2" 22.0 118.1 22.3 118.1 48.5 122.9 54.0 122.9 Job Name : 504 Concentration Resistivity Geotech Consultants #04318-1 Job Number 1174-004-00 bate : 5-30-06 Tested By ; Clayton Boring # 8-8 8-8 . Sample # A 8 Depth 0.0-5.0' 0.0-5.0' Resistivity (ohm -cm) 4.5 x 10 5.2 x .1. - - Dilution 10 10 Correction 1,28 2.66 r . SO4 Reading -......r....M...,.‘,:ri,,..,A,J.:- 9.72 7.06 pail (mg/I)7 'il4.4 .' 44.0 Baring # B-8 8-8 . Sample # A 8 bepth lk 0.0-5.0' 0.0-5.0' Resistivity (ohm -cm) 4.5 x 10 5.2 x .1. - - r . GeoEriqineers Note A/E GRAPHICS INC. /boom= 1' (262)781-7744 MILWAUrn P (44)225-987* MIQUON p (254)24s-566o 4uAirrI sat I aamu+e:l M Wcwronmu Reid iddleton January 31, 2007 File No. 262006.005/01802 Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Subject: Building Permit Plan Review — Final Submittal Kohl's Department Store (D06-388) Dear Mr. Benedicto: RECEIVED FEB .-1 NW PERMIT CER We reviewed the proposed project for compliance with the structural provisions of the 2003 International Building Code (IBC) as amended and adopted by the state of Washington and the city of Tukwila. The permit applicant has responded successfully to our comments. Individual revised structural sheets were submitted in response to subsequent discussions with the design team and inserted into the revised drawing sets. The other sets of drawings should be reconciled in preparation for permit issuance. The revised sheets are: S3.1 -S3.5. Portions of the structural design have been deferred by the structural engineer for submittal to the city of Tukwila until after issuance of the initial building permit. The applicant should recognize that the city of Tukwila may require the issuance of additional permits. The following deferred submittals are identified: 1. Design drawings for open -web steel joists and girders. 2. Design drawings for prefabricated stair systems (i.e., steel stairways). 3. Design drawings for exterior cladding (i.e., curtain wall systems). Special inspections by the geotechnical engineer should be provided as recommended in the geotechnical report by Geotech Consultants, dated June 20, 2006. The following is a summary: 1. Site excavation and grading. 2. Placement of structural fill and soil compaction. 3. Preload/surcharge program at building area. 4. Monitoring of settlement of preload/surcharge fill. 5. Verification of soil -bearing capacity. 6. Placement and compaction of foundation and retaining wall backfill. Engineers Planners Surveyors Reid Middleton, Inc. 728134th Street SW Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 Ph: 425 741-3800 Fox: 425 741-3900 Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila January 31, 2007 File No. 262006.005/01802 Page 2 Structural special inspections by qualified special inspectors should be provided. The following is a summary: 1. Concrete placement at concrete construction, including precast (tilt -up) reinforced concrete walls and concrete topping at steel floor decks: Continuous. 2. Reinforcement at concrete construction: Periodic. 3. Reinforcement at, and installation of, precast (tilt -up) reinforced concrete walls: Periodic. 4. Anchor bolts/rods at concrete foundation: Continuous. 5. Fabrication and erection of structural steel: Periodic. 6. Structural welding of structural steel for single -pass fillet welds (maximum 5/16 inch) and floor/roof deck welds: Periodic. 7. Structural welding of structural steel, other than single -pass fillet welds (maximum 5/16 -inch) and floor/roof deck welds, where applicable: Continuous. 8. High-strength bolting of structural steel other than slip -critical: Periodic. 9. High-strength bolting of structural steel, slip -critical, where applicable: Continuous. 10. Erection of open -web steel joists and girders: Periodic. Enclosed are two sets of the revised structural drawings, the original architectural drawings, structural calculations, project specifications and correspondence from the structural engineer for your records. If you have any questions or need additional clarification, please contact us. Sincerely, Reid Middleton, Phili Brazil, P.E., S.E. Senior Engineer Enclosures cc: David Baum, Schroeder and Holt Architects (by surface mail) Bob Steckel, Ambrose Engineering (by surface mail) mmtldoc1261planrevwltukwila1061t018r2.doclprb Reid iddleton PHONE 414.276.1160 MX 414.276.1764 mail@schroederandholf.com anuary 8, 2007 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Attn: Jennifer Marshall Re: Kohl's Department Store (D06-388) South Center Square 17200 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 Dear Ms. Marshall: RECEIVE JAN -9 2007 PERMIT CENTEt SHA Job No. 3079 The following is our response to your correction letter dated December 8, 2006. The original review comments are in italics and the responses are in bold. Planning Division Comments The following are in response to Moira Bradshaw's Request for Revisions dated 11-24-2006. Sheet SP Square footage on site plan should indicated 97,103 for Kohl's...T he square footage on sheet SP has been corrected to indicate 97,103 sf. Sheet SDI Clarify scope of work. For example, landscaping is located within boundary of lines indicating Kohl's but no landscaping plan has been submitted ...Scope of work has been, clarified on SDI. Landscaping plan submitted with developer's sitework; PW06-158. Please consider either shortening the easternmost planter on the north wall or wrapping the corner. Additional landscaping is required in this corner as a condition of the BAR...The planter at the NE corner of the store is to remain as is to be consistent with the other planters. The landscaping has been revised to include the conditions of the BAR. See also landscaping plan submitted with developer's sitework; PW06-158. Provide minimum area for recycling — that is 5 square feet per 1,000 square feet offloor loor area or 485 square feet.... The compactor enclosure has been revised to indicate the recyclable cardboard compactor, in addition additional recycling bins are shown to meet the minimum required area. Remove bollards around east exits and transformer as this is not a drivable area.... The bollards have been removed around the east exits and transformer. Sheet A3 Decorative exterior light fixture is missing from westernmost column on north wall. Replace security wall fixtures over emergency exits with afixture that complements the character of building and the architectural features on east wall....Light fixture has been added to westernmost column on north wall. Security fixtures will be replaced with fixture similar to decorative fixtures on north wall. Developer approved fixture will be submitted prior to installation. Additionally, please find enclosed four (4) complete sets of revised plans are being submitted for your review. Should you have any questions or concerns regarding the enclosed, please feel free to contact me directly. Sincerely, SCHROEDER & HOLT ARCHITECTS, LTD. Jeil•Yey 14I. Stowe, AIA Project Manager cc: David C. Baum - Project Architect, Schroeder and Holt Tim Wiedenbauer - Kohl's Art Papaceno-Kohl's Ciy of Tukwlla Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development December 8, 2006 Jeff Stowe Schroeder and Holt Architects 244 N Broadway Milwaukee, WI 53202 RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Permit Application Number D06-388 Kohl's Department Store —17200 Southcenter Py Dear Mr. Stowe, Steve l4ncaster, Director w This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit(s) can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and, reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Planning Department. At this time the Building, Fire and Public Works Departments have no comments. Planning Department: Moira Carr Brandshaw, at 206 431-3651, if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. • If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 433-7165. Sincerely, POVIA Jen*fifer arshall e it Te4hnician encl File No. D06-388 P:Uennifer,Conection Leners120061D06-388 Correction Ur #I.DOC jem 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 Planning Division Comments Planner: Moira Carr Bradshaw, Senior Planner Department of Community Development Planning Division 206 431 3651; mbradshaw@ci.tukwila.wa.us Date: 24 November 2006 Subject: D06-388 Request for Revisions Sheet SP . Square footage on site plan should indicate 97,103 for Kohl's Sheet Sal Clarify scope of work. For example, landscaping is located within boundary of lines indicating Kohl's but no landscape plan has been submitted. Please consider either shortening the easternmost planter on the north wall or wrapping the corner. Additional landscaping is required in this comer as a condition of BAR. Provide minimum area for recycling -- that is 5 square feet per 1,000 square feet of gross floor area or 485 square feet. Remove bollards around east exits and transformer as this is not a drivable area. Sheet A 3 Decorative exterior light fixture is missing from westernmost column on north wall. Replace security wall fixtures over emergency exits with a fixture that complements the character of building and the architectural features on east wall. Landscape and Site Plan comments are with PW06-158 Q:IHOME MOIRA kohlslo06-388.doc Reid iddleton November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila, Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Subject: Building Permit Plan Review — First Submittal Kohl's Department Store (D06-388) Dear Mr. Benedicto: RECEIVED NOV 21 2006 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 11-7`1"O 1Ak We reviewed the proposed project for compliance with the structural provisions of the 2003 International Building Code (IBC) as amended and adopted by the state of Washington and the city of Tukwila. The permit applicant should address the comments below. Note that the "WSxx" code references are to Washington State Amendments of the applicable code. Responses to the review comments below should be made in an itemized letter form. We recommend the permit applicant have the architect and structural engineer respond and resubmit two sets of the revised structural drawings and one copy of the supplemental structural calculations. All information should be submitted directly to Reid Middleton, Inc. Geotechnical 1. Special inspections by the geotechnical engineer should be provided as recommended in the geotechnical report by Geotech Consultants, dated June 20, 2006. See 113C Sections 1704.7 and 1802. The following is a summary: a. Site excavation and grading. b. Placement of structural fill and soil compaction. c. Preload/surcharge program at building area. d. Monitoring of settlement of preload/surcharge fill. e. Verification of soil -bearing capacity. f. Placement and compaction of foundation and retaining wall backfill. Architectural 1. Portions of the structural design have been deferred by the structural engineer for submittal to the city of Tukwila until after issuance of the initial building permit. See IBC Section 106.3.4.2. The following deferred submittals are identified: Engineers Planners Surveyors Washington Oregon Alaska Reid Middleton, Inc 728134th Street SW Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 Ph: 425 741-3800 Fax: 425 741-3900 Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Page 2 a. Design drawings for open -web steel joists and girders. b. Design drawings for prefabricated stair systems (i.e., steel stairways). c. Design drawings for exterior cladding (i.e., curtain wall systems). 2. A design for the lateral support of the anchored brick masonry veneer should be added to the drawings for review. The wall sections on Sheets A5.1 -A5.3 do not provide a design and it does not appear that a design is included in the structural drawings. See IBC Section 1405.5. Note that the structural drawings typically reference the architectural drawings for the design of the brick veneer (i.e., Details 10/S1.2 and 20/S1.2). Structural General 1. Structural special inspections by qualified special inspectors should be provided. See IBC Sections 1704 and 1707. The following is a summary: a. Concrete placement at concrete construction, including precast (tilt -up) reinforced concrete walls and concrete topping at steel floor decks: Continuous, see also Section 1704.4. b. Reinforcement at concrete construction: Periodic, see also Section 1704.4. c. Reinforcement at, and installation of, precast (tilt -up) reinforced concrete walls: Periodic, see also Section 1704.4. d. Anchor bolts/rods at concrete foundation: Continuous, see also Sections 1704.4 and 1707.1. e. Fabrication and erection of structural steel: Periodic, see also Section 1704.3. f. Structural welding of structural steel for single -pass fillet welds (maximum 5/16 -inch) and floor/roof deck welds: Periodic, see also Section 1704.3. g. Structural welding of structural steel, other than single -pass fillet welds (maximum 5/16 -inch) and floor/roof deck welds, where applicable: Continuous, see also Section 1704.3. h. High-strength bolting of structural steel other than slip -critical: Periodic, see also Section 1704.3. i. High-strength bolting of structural steel, slip -critical, where applicable: Continuous, see also IBC Section 1704.3, Section M5.4 of the AISC Specification (AISC-LRFD or AISC-ASD), and RCSC Section 9.3. j. Erection of open -web steel joists and girders: Periodic, see also Section 1704.3. 2. Section 10-2 of the structural notes on special inspection, Sheet S0.1, should be Reid iddieton Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Page 3 revised by specifying additional special inspections (i.e., fabrication/erection of structural steel, high-strength bolting and erection of open -web steel joists/girders). Note that the types of special inspections are required to be included in the quality assurance plan. See IBC Section 1705.2(4). Refer to Sections 1704 and 1707 and the structural comment above to determine the additional types of special inspections. 3. Section 10-2 of the structural notes on special inspection, Sheet S0.1, should be revised by changing the indication of partial inspection to full inspection for anchor bolts and concrete. See IBC Section 1704.4. Refer to the structural comments above for further information. 4. The basis for the minimum tension development and splice lengths for reinforcement in concrete, Section 3-13 of the structural notes, is not clear. Substantiating data should be submitted documenting the method used to determine the values. A note should be added to Section 3-13 documenting the basis for the lengths. See IBC Section 1901.2 and Sections 12.2 and 12.15 of ACI 318-02. We recommend values based on placement of reinforcement with (1) a minimum clear spacing of 2 db and a minimum clear cover of db, and (2) a clear spacing less than 2 db or a minimum clear cover less than db (other cases). The currently specified lengths are substantially Less than lengths based on this recommendation. Refer to Section 12.2.2 of ACI 318-02. 5. It is unclear from the drawings and General Notes what type of filler metal should be used in the welding of light gage steel studs, light gage metal deck, and structural steel. Is Ambrose Engineering assuming E60xx electrodes for light gage steel studs, minimum E60xx electrodes for light gage steel deck, and E70xx electrodes for structural steel? Please clarify the drawings and resubmit for review, Foundation 6. Per page 10 of the geotechnical report dated June 20, 2006, the floor slab should be reinforced with #4 reinforcing bars at 18 inches on center. The foundation plan on Sheet S1.1, however, specifies steel fiber reinforcement or #3 bars at 18 inches o.c. Please revise and resubmit Sheet 1.1 to show the slab reinforcement as indicated by the geotechnical engineer. 7. The geotechnical report on page 10 also recommends that the concrete slab -on - grade be tied into the perimeter with #4 reinforcing bars at 18 inches on center. The foundation plan on Sheet S1.1, however, specifies #3 bars. The foundation plan should be revised. Reid iddleton Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005101801 Page 4 Vertical No comments. Lateral 8, The connection of the steel roof deck to the perimeter and collector elements parallel to the flutes should be specified at the Roof Deck Key Plan, Sheet S3. I, for review. For example, refer to General Note #7, page 7, of ICC -ES ER -2078 on Verco steel decks for further information. 9. The connections of the steel floor deck (i.e., supports, side laps and parallel to flutes) should be specified at the mezzanine framing plan, Sheet S2.1, to enable review of the diaphragm capacity of the floor deck. Note that Section 5-5 of the structural notes, Sheet SO.1, references the "plan" for this information but we are unable to verify this information in the drawings. 10. Pages L1 -L11 of the calculations indicate that 2000 IBC lateral loads were used in the design of this building. The 2003 IBC, however, is the governing code in the city of Tukwila. Sheet S0.1 of the drawings also indicates that the 2003 IBC is the governing code. Please confirm the design complies with the 2003 IBC and revise and resubmit for review all affected calculations and drawings. 11. Sheet SO.1 of the drawings, under Seismic Load, indicates special reinforced concrete shear walls with a Response Modification Coefficient (R coefficient) of 5.5 and the equivalent lateral force analysis method was used in the design of building. Per Section 1616.6 of the 2003 IBC and Table 9.5.2.2 of ASCE 7-02, the R coefficient of 5.0 should be used with the equivalent lateral force method for special reinforced concrete shear walls. It appears the R coefficient of 5.5 is from the 2000 IBC. Please revise and resubmit for review an updated Iateral analysis using the corrected R coefficient. The structural design may need to be revised. Please verify. 12. Sheet S2.1 of the drawings indicates a composite slab with a total depth of 4 inches at the mezzanine level. The plan view of the mezzanine gives the option to use steel fiber reinforcement at the exclusion of welded wire mesh in the composite deck. Slabs on metal deck should include steel reinforcement such as welded wire mesh to conform to the ICC Engineering Services (ES) diaphragm load test assemblies. For example, see ICC -ES ER- 2078P, General Note #10, page 7. Please revise and resubmit the drawings to include welded wire mesh or other steel Reid iddleton Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Page 5 reinforcement regardless of the use of steel fiber, so as to conform to ICC standards. 13. Sections P, R and S on Sheet A5.3 indicate face brick by the structural concrete panels, but do not show any connections. The structural drawings do not appear to include any design of the face brick to the concrete panels. Please revise and resubmit drawings showing how the face brick is to be supported and connected to the panels. See also the architectural comments above. 14. Detail 30/S4.1 references Detail 35/S4.1. It appears this call -out should be Detail 25/S4.1 instead of the detail indicated. Please clarify and revise and resubmit the detail showing the correct call -out. 15. Detail 30/S4.1 indicates a flare bevel weld connecting the 2 -inch diameter pipe to the L3x3 angle, but does not indicate a size of weld nor an effective throat for the weld. Please revise the detail showing the size of weld so as to allow for review of the connection. 16. Detail 2/S4.2 shows a beam to column connection using bolts. The center -to -center and edge distance spacing of the bolts is referred to as "AISC SPEC." which is unclear. Section J.3 of the AISC LRFD 3'I Edition indicates "the distance between centers of (bolts) shall not be less than 2 2/3 times the nominal diameter; a distance of 3 diameters is preferred". Also Table 7-17 of the AISC LRFD 3'I Edition similarly shows two spacings for the center -to -center distance between bolts. Please revise and resubmit the drawings showing the edge distances and distance between bolts, so as to allow the connections to be reviewed. 17. It is unclear from the design drawings and calculations if the mezzanine diaphragm has the capacity to meet the loading indicated in Section 1605.1 of the 2003 IBC. PIease address the following comments: a. Page L14 of the calculations indicates the lateral force resisting system is composed of 4 walls, but does not show where these walls are. Please show in the revised calculations the locations of the shear walls, and identify what appears to be an ordinary brace frame along Grid 3.9 shown on Sheet S2.1 with the loading this frame takes. b. The calculations are unclear as to how the difference in stiffness and the resulting distribution in lateral forces between the braced frame and the concrete shear walls have been considered. Please provide substantiating data, such as additional calculations, that clearly show how the difference in stiffness Reid iddleton Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Page 6 between the concrete shear walls and the proposed bracing has been calculated, and what is the distribution of lateral forces due to this difference. c. The calculations are unclear as to whether the diaphragm has the capacity to transfer shear forces around the openings in the diaphragm. Please provide substantiating data, such as additional calculations that show the diaphragm has the capacity to transfer shear around the multiple opening. For example, please show the diaphragm has the capacity to transfer shear forces around the opening that exists from Grid 4 to 4.5 as shown on Sheet 2.1, so as to indicate the braced frame does have an interaction with the diaphragm south of Grid 4.5. 18. It appears from page L8 of the calculations that a one-third stress increase is assumed for load combinations that include wind or earthquake loads. We assume that the alternative ASD load combinations of IBC Section 1605.3.2 are being used. For these load combinations, allowable stresses are permitted to be increased or load combinations reduced where permitted by the material section of the 2003 IBC or referenced standard. This is typically not the case for material design. The calculations should be revised by eliminating use of the one-third stress increase and resubmitted for review. The structural design may also need to be revised. Please verify. Note that the 1989 AISC ASD Specification plus Supplement No. 1 (December 17, 2001) is the referenced standard for allowable stress design of structural steel in the 2003 IBC and Supplement No.1 deletes all references to stress increases in the 1989 Specification. 19. There appears to be a reentrant corner at Grid 6.1/H as shown on Sheet S1.1. Section 1617.4 of the 2003 IBC and Section 9.5.2.6.2.4 along with Table 9.5.2.3.2 of the ASCE 7-02 indicate a 25 percent load increase shall be applied to the diaphragms, collectors, and connections due to this plan irregularity. The calculations are unclear as to if this required load increase has been considered. Please provide substantiating data, such as additional calculations clearly showing the 25 percent increase in loading, that indicate the proposed diaphragm, collections, and connections satisfy the 2003 IBC requirements. 20. The calculations are unclear as to the lateral load being delivered to the concrete shear walls. Please clarify and resubmit the calculations to allow for a review of the structural design, by showing the lateral forces being delivered to the shear walls, and the design of the shear walls, including consideration of required shear strength, flexural and axial loads, and boundary elements of Section 21.7 of ACI 318-02. The structural design may need to be revised. Please verify. 21. The calculations do not appear to include a consideration of the out -of -plane Reid iddleton Mr. Bob Benedicto, Building Official City of Tukwila November 20, 2006 File No. 262006.005/01801 Page 7 loading on the concrete panels and from the panels to the building. Please provide substantiating data that shows the proposed panels and their connections are adequate to satisfy the out -of -plane loading in Section 1620.1 of the 2003 IBC. Please note the design force per individual anchor referenced in Section 9.5.2.6.4.1 and Section 9.5.2.6.3.2 of ASCE 7-02. The structural design may need to be revised. Please verify. 22. The concrete walls are required to be anchored to the mezzanine floor and building roof, which provide out -of -plane lateral support for the walls or are supported by the walls. The calculations do not appear to consider this but the drawings do appear to provide a certain amount of design information for the required anchorage. Substantiating data should be submitted verifying structural adequacy, including consideration of continuous ties or struts between diaphragm chords to distribute diaphragm forces into the diaphragm, flexural demands in the walls between anchors where the anchor spacing exceeds 48 inches, and the option of subdiaphragms for transmitting the anchorage forces to the main continuous cross ties. The types and spacing of the anchors should be specified (or revised) on the framing plans for review. Details sufficient to provide a design for the installation of the anchors should be added to (or revised on) the drawings for review. See IBC Sections 1604,8.2 and 1620.1 and Sections 9.5.2.6.4 and 9.5.2.6.3.2 of ASCE 7-02. Corrections and comments made during the review process do not relieve the permit applicant or the designers from compliance with code requirements, conditions of approval, and permit requirements; nor are the designers relieved of responsibility for a complete design in accordance with the laws of the state of Washington. This review is for general compliance with the International Building Code as it relates to the project. If you have any questions or need additional clarification, please contact us. Sincerely, Reid Middleton, Ph p Brazil, P.E., S.E. Senior Engineer Al Findlay, P.E. Design Engineer cc: David Baum, Schroeder and Holt Architects (by surface mail) Bob Steckel, Ambrose Engineering (by surface mail) dIs1261p lanr ev wltukwil a1061t018r 1. doclpr b Reid iddleton City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster Director NOTICE OF COMPLETE APPLICATION October 25, 2006 Jeff Stowe Schroeder and Holt Architects 244 North Broadway Milwaukee, W1 53202 Subject: Kohl's Department Store D06-388 Dear Mr. Stowe: Your application for the construction of a 97,866 square foot retail building proposed at 17200 Southcenter Py, Tukwila, Washington is considered complete on October 17, 2006 for the purposes of meeting state mandated time requirements. The Notice of Application will also be mailed by the City to agencies having jurisdiction and parties of record. This determination of complete application does not preclude the ability of the City to require that you submit additional plans or information, if in our estimation such information is necessary to ensure tie project meets the substantive requirements of the City or to complete the review process. This notice of complete application applies only to the permits identified above. It is your responsibility to apply for and obtain all necessary permits issued by other agencies. If you should have any questions, please contact me at (206) 431-3670. Brenda Holt, Permit Coordinator Xc: Permit File No. D06-388 Parties of Record Q:INotice Application-Declsion\D06-368 - Notice of Complete Application.DOC bh 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 Kathy Kunz US Army Corps of Engineers 4735 East Marginal Way S Seattle, WA 98134 Wig Properties 4811-134x` Place SE Bellevue, WA 98006 Larry Fisher WA Department of Fish and Wildlife North Puget Sound 16018 Mill Creek Blvd Mill Creek, WA 98012 KC Assessor's Office Accounting Division 500 Fourth Avenue, Room 709A Seattle, WA 98104 Richard Robohm DOE 3190 — 160th avenue SE Bellevue, WA 98008 Georgina Kerr 3834 South 116th Street Tukwila, WA 98168 Rebekah Padgett Federal Permit Coordinator — 401/CZM DOE, NW Regional Office 390 — 160th Avenue SE Bellevue, WA 98008 174t443.0 KL04)K9._. 500l'havv444/ Interdepartmental Memorandum To: Permit Division From: Moira Carr Bradshaw, Senior Planner Department of Community Development Planning Division 206 431 3651; mbradshaw@ci.tukwila.wa.us Date: 24 October 2006 Subject: D06-388 Request for Revisions Sheet SP . Square footage on site plan should indicate 97,103 for Kohl's Sheet SDI Clarify scope of work. For example, landscaping is located within boundary of lines indicating Kohl's but no landscape plan has been submitted. Please consider either shortening the eastemmost planter on the north wall or wrapping the comer. Additional landscaping is required in this comer as a condition of BAR. Provide minimum area for recycling — that is 5 square feet per 1,000 square feet of gross floor area or 485 square feet. Remove bollards around east exits and transformer as this is not a drivable area. Sheet A 3 Decorative exterior light fixture is missing from westemmost column on north wall. Replace security wall fixtures over emergency exits with a fixture that complements the character of building and the architectural features on east wall. Landscape and Site Plan comments are with PW06-158 Q:IHOMEIMOI RAlpenneys\D06-388.doc October 17, 2006 City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director Dave Swanson, P.E. Reid Middleton 728 - 134th Street SW, Suite 200 Everett, WA 98204 RE: Structural Review Kohl's Department Store -- 006-388 17200 Southcenter Py, Tukwila Dear Mr. Swanson: Please review the enclosed plans and documents for structural compliance with the 2003 International Building Code. If you should have any questions, please feel free to contact me at (206)431-3672. Sincerely, (1)112 Brenda Holt, Permit Coordinator encl xc: Permit File No. D06-388 QADoeumentalStruetural Consultant\D06-388 - atructural review.DOC Page 1 of 1 bh 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206-431-3670 • Fax: 206-431-3665 PW Review Check List Koh I Da T • �T° CeFr- Permit Number 1)i1 - 3 gg Project Name (� Project Address Development Engineer M'° DATE r:0 00 cor (\O -Q % re R ?L..1,0 to .06 Construction Cost estimates Onsite Right-of-way N 41 c Number of Correction Letters Pavement is less than three years old and can not be cut. iutk Pavement mitigation fee calculation wit Estimated remaining pavement life - %. Charge per square foot of cut $ Estimated cut area before issuance Pavement mitigation fee Transportation mitigation fee calculation (Ord. 2111) Dev• al f+""°'1-1- 160%- oga Zone Use 4 t .pk is F Unit of measure Fee/Unit of Measure " a 1-,43626 Ger F --,c Fee-' 1 51+.0 re, "`--k. CLQ F A 1 s 9 (, / s F i9 1 g r q . 31 K- 1 Assessments Allentown Water Allentown Sewer Ryan Hill Water Duwamish/Foster Sewer LID Water LID Sewer /.J A— Financial Guarantees Performance ROW (150% of Estimate) Performance onsite (150%of estimate) Performance Subdivision illumination ( Maintenance ROW (1O% of Estimate) Maintenance Subdivision Illumination (10% of construction cost) , / A N TOO/ C144_ ("co,- -X/si To 5r -(o . ke-o.i on Sl tur F'/ 1 City of Tukwila Impact Fee Zones NOT 7n SCALE Impact Fee Schedule 2006 Land Uses Unit of Measure Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Cost per Trip > $1,424.71 $1,345.46 $1,071.73 $807.07 Commercial - Retail Shopping Center up to 9,999 sq ft sq ft/GLA $3.43 _ $3.24 $2.58 $1.94 10,000 sq ft -49,999 sq ft sq ft/GLA $3.01 $2.84 $226 $1.70 50,000 sq ft -99,999 sq ft sq ft/GLA $2.20 $2.08 51.65 $1.25 100,000 sq ft -199,999 sq ft sq ft/GLA $2.15 52.03, $1.62 $1.22 R00;000-sg1t-299;999-sq'ft'',1'sc `..f /GLA.; ...v.; -.$1,:96 t 51.85 $1.47 $1.11 300,000 sq ft -399,999 sq ft sq ft/GLA $2.32 $2.19 $1.75 $1.31 over 400,000 sq ft sq ft/GLA $2.61 $2.47 $1.97 $1.48 Miscellaneous Retail Sales . _ sq ft/GFA $1.19 $1.12 $0.89 $0.67 permarket sq ft/GFA $6.98 $6.59 $5.25 53.95 1 Conveniece Market sq ft/GFA $12.10 $11.43 $9.10 $6.86 Nursery/Garden Center sq ft/GFA $1.74 $1.64 $1.31 $0.99 Furniture Store sq ft/GFA $0.18 $0.17 $0.13 $0.10 Car Sales - New/Used sq ft/GFA $3.97 $3.75 $2.98 $2.25 Auto Care Center sq ft/GLA $1.55 $1.46 $1.17 $0.88 Quick Lubrication Vehicle Shop Service Bay $1,358.94 $1,283.35 $1,022.26 $769.82- 769.82Auto AutoParts Sales sq ft/GFA $2.74 $2.59 $2.06 $1.55 Pharmacy(with Drive Through) sq ft/GFA _ $3.40 $3.21 $2.56 $1.93 Free Standing Discount Store sq ft/GFA $2.40 $2.27 51.81 $1.36 Hardware/Paint Store sq ftIGFA $2.03 $1.91 $1.52 $1.15 Discount Club sq ft/GFA $4.10 $3.87 $3.08 - $2.32 Video Rental sq ftIGFA $3.06 $2.89 52.30 $1.74 Home Improvement Superstore sq ft/GFA $1.62 $1.53 $1.22 ' $0.92 Tire Store Service Bay $1,590.01 $1,501.57 $1,196.08 $900.72 Electronics Superstore sq ft/GFA $2.55 $2.41 $1.92 $1.44 Commercial - Office Administrative Office up to 9,999 sq ft sq ft/GFA $6.65 $6.28 •$5.00 $3.76 10,000 sq ft -49,999 sq ft sq ft/GFA $6.65 $6.28 $5.00 $3.76 50,000 sq ft -99,999 sq ft sq ft/GFA $3.85 $3.64 $2.90 $2.18 100,000 sq ft -199,999 sgft sq ft/GFA $2.92 $2.75 $2.19 $1.65 200,000 sq ft -299,999 sq ft sq ft/GFA $2.55 $2.40 $1.91 51.44 over 300,000 sq ft _ sq ft/GFA $2.39 $2.25 $1.79 $1.35 Medical Office/Clinic sq ft/GFA $5.66 $5.34 $4.25 $3.20, GLA= Gross Leasible Area GFA= Gross Floor Area VFP= Vehicle Fueling Potiiions (Maximum number of vehicles that can be fueled simultaneously) 720B4 N-19: 0B G -A -. -( 74: Loco 51-44 2 k 5 y 5:1e!?"#' TO Mod SEATTLE TARP COMPANY To: Lumber Muret $E: Fire Ret erdunt Mattel August 24, 20E4 Fax Totems Ileum ros.. HrL . olio.%smiipt p Pim piredbyww*eas To Moot it May Cos.xra: limits:OP 40436, gnaatity(8) j0'170' elm grsy woes or neaodal NFPA 701 fur Are retor cy. 143:3476-11,2 (Ton Pie) 1 -20646S -201s (Office) 1-206-54715 tire) Think Yea Sub. Perlstti 2122 Wit nonce Bye. WA.14i99 flout 2064E4811 Tel 366.185471.1 Toll Tree ass4/64u2 SZL6G4L90L WET *IASL/OL/al8 RECEIVEDINCOMPLETE CIiYfIFTtlIcwlLA LTR# r t)civ• 3FILE COPY SOUTHCENTER SQUARE METER AND BACKFLOW TALLY Domestic Meters WO# Permit # N1 2" Existing relocate PW06-099 S1 2" Existing relocate PW06-099 Kohl's 1.5" 5106d06 PW06-099 E3 2" 5207c06 PW06-099 Domestic RPPA Make/Model N1 2" Not provided PW06-099 S1 2" Not provided PW06-099 Kohl's 1.5" Not provided PWO6-099 E3 2" Not provided PW06-099 Irrigation Meter N1 1.5" NA PW06-099 S1 None Shown NA NA Kohl's 1.5" NA PW06-099 E3 None Shown NA NA North Parking lot 2" NA PW06-099 Irrigation Backflow Prevention Make/Model N1 1.5" Not provided PW06-099 Si None Shown Not provided NA Kohl's 1.5" None Shown Not provided Not provided PW06-099 NA E3 North Parking lot 2" Not provided PW06-099 Fire Line Backflow Make/Model N1 8" Not provided PW06-099 S1 8" 8" Not provided Not provided PW06-099 PW06-099 Kohl's E3 8" Not provided PW06-099 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D06-388 DATE: 01-09-07 PROJECT NAME: KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE SITE ADDRESS: 17200 SOUTHCENTER PY Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works • n Fire Prevention Structural 110 AG 1 Plann ng Division Permit Coordinator n DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete ❑l Incomplete Comments: DUE DATE: 01-11-07 Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUESITHURS ROUTING: Please Route REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 02-08-07 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions1M Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D06-388 DATE: 10-30-06 PROJECT NAME: KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORE SITE ADDRESS: 17200 SOUTHCENTER PY X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: MGIi4 B in Division 141 Public Works Fire Prevention Structural E tvio d 12-7 Planning Division Permit Coordinator ❑ DETERMINATION Of COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete ❑ Comments: Incomplete ❑ DUE DATE: 10-31-06 Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LEITER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROU NG: Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: No further Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 11-28-06 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) R/ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: MVP? Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ PingX PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 N� DAA OV- & Ef 1. PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D06-388 DATE: 10-16-06 PROJECT NAME: KOHL'S DEPARTMENT STORES SITE ADDRESS: 17200 SOUTHCENTER PY X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division P blit Wor t4 i/ [a - Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Incomplete ❑ DUE DATE: 10-17-06 Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only h,� INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LEITER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: ID 4 4(0 Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials: J ' PF TUESITHURS ROU ING: Please Route 311 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: No further Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions El Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DUE DATE: 11-14-06 Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-2802 City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Steve Lancaster, Director REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Plan Check/Permit Number: D06-388 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 O Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Kohl's Department Store Project Address: 17200 Southcenter Py REDEfVED JAN -g zoos PERMIT CENTE1- Contact Person: Jeff Stowe Phone Number: (414) 276-1760 Summary of Revision: See attached letter for summary of revisions SheetNumber(s): T1, SP, SDI, & A3 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: igEntered in Permits Plus on ll IA( vls- \applications\forms-applications on linelrevision submittal Created: 843-2004 Revised: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Soutbcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwilawa.us Steven M Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fry etc. Date: Plan Check/Permit Number: 27 6 - 3gg Response to Incomplete Letter # O Response to Correction Letter # ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Project Address: /47/4(5701.0' F2� ,S(�ler/lair'' Contact Person: �/ s r' Phone Number: zilli RECEIVED CITY of TuK1MLA OCT 3 02006 PERMIT CENF Summary of Revision: /)7f7V �ra /)/ 4iier �ir�i "e44//1 s66dy.efrs-/Or Sheet Number(s): , 2 - "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center b . Entered in Permits Plus on V lapplicationslforms-applications on linelrevision submittal • Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: Look Up a Contractor, Electrician or Plumber License Detail Page 1 of 3 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries General/Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L&I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. License Information License BAYLECG034JC Licensee Name BAYLEY CONST A GEN PARTNRSHP Licensee Type CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR UBI 601771879 Ind. Ins. Account Id PARTNER Business Type PARTNERSHIP Address 1 PO BOX 9004 Address 2 City MERCER ISLAND County KING State WA Zip 980409004 Phone 2066218884 Status ACTIVE Specialty 1 GENERAL Specialty 2 UNUSED Effective Date 4/3/1997 Expiration Date 12/31/2007 Suspend Date Separation Date Parent Company Previous License ROBEREB375NO Next License Associated License Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date BAYLEY KEY MEMBERS INC PARTNER 01/01/1980 Bond Amount BAYLEY HOLDINGS INC PARTNER 01(01/19$0 Bond Information _ — ' Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Carncel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date SAFECO INS CO OF Until https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/printer.aspx?License=BAYLECG034JC 02/20/2007